Clinical trial NCT02973321
Conditions: Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus
Sponsor: Sanofi
Start date: 2016-12-02; Completion date: 2017-12-27
Enrollment: 296 participants; Allocation: RANDOMIZED; Intervention model: PARALLEL

Brief summary:
Primary Objective:

The primary objective of this study was to assess the dose-response relationship of SAR425899 versus placebo in terms of glycemic control as measured by the change in glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c).

Secondary Objectives:

* To assess the effect of SAR425899 on body weight.
* To assess the safety and immunogenicity profile of SAR425899, including assessment of the heart rate (HR) change by electrocardiogram (ECG) and Holter monitor.
* To assess the proportion of participants achieving predefined HbA1c targets of \<7% and \<6.5% as well as the proportion of participants achieving \>=5% and \>=10% body weight loss.
* To assess the effect of once daily dosing of SAR425899 on additional parameters of glycemic control and lipid metabolism.
* To assess the effect of once daily dosing of SAR425899 on additional pharmacodynamic (PD) biomarkers.
* To assess the pharmacokinetic (PK) profile and parameters of SAR425899, inter-individual and inter-occasion variability in PK parameters using a population PK approach.

Detailed description:
The total study duration will be approximately 30 weeks, consisting of 3 weeks screening period at the site, a 26 weeks treatment period, and 3 days post treatment follow up period.

Arms: arm 1: Placebo (for SAR425899) subcutaneous (SC) injection once daily (QD) from Week 1 to Week 26, matching 3 SAR425899 dose levels of 0.12 mg, 0.16 mg and 0.20 mg. arm 2: SAR425899 SC injection QD at maintenance dose of 0.12 mg for 25 weeks (Week 2 to Week 26) following 1 week dose increase step (0.06 mg at Week 1). arm 3: SAR425899 SC injection QD at maintenance dose of 0.16 mg for 24 weeks (Week 3 to Week 26) following 2 weeks dose increase step (0.06 mg at Week 1 and 0.12 mg at Week 2). arm 4: SAR425899 SC injection QD at maintenance dose of 0.20 mg for 23 weeks (Week 4 to Week 26) following 3 weeks dose increase step (0.06 mg at Week 1, 0.12 mg at Week 2 and 0.16 mg at Week 3). arm 5: Liraglutide SC injection QD at maintenance dose of 1.8 mg for 24 weeks (Week 3 to Week 26) following 2 weeks dose increase steps (0.6 mg daily at Week 1 and by 1.2 mg daily at Week 2).
Interventions: intervention 1: SAR425899 intervention 2: Placebo intervention 3: Liraglutide intervention 4: Metformin
Intervention descriptions: intervention 1: Self-administered by SC injection using a solution for injection in cartridge. intervention 2: Self-administered by SC injection using a solution for injection in cartridge. intervention 3: Self-administered by SC injection using a pre-filled pen. intervention 4: Orally administered at a stable dose , \>=1500 mg daily stable dose or maximal tolerated dose.

Protocol documents:
Prot_000.pdf: 
Any and all information presented in this document shall be treated as confidential and shall remain the exclusive property of Sanofi (or any of its 
affiliated companies). The use of such confidential information must be restricted to the recipient for the agreed purpose and must not be 
disclosed, published or otherwise communicated to any unauthorized persons, for any reason, in any form whatsoever without the prior written 
consent of Sanofi (or the concerned affiliated company); ‘affiliated company’ means any corporation, partnership or other entity which at the date 
of communication or afterwards (i) controls directly or indirectly Sanofi, (ii) is directly or indirectly controlled by Sanofi, with ‘control’ meaning 
direct or indirect ownership of more than 50% of the capital stock or the voting rights in such corporation, partnership or other entity 
According to template: QSD-003152 VERSION N°3.0 (04-FEB-2016) 
Page 1 
AMENDED CLINICAL TRIAL PROTOCOL NO. 01 
COMPOUND: SAR425899 
A 26-week Randomized, Double-blind, Placebo-controlled, Dose-ranging Phase 2 
Study to Assess the Safety and Efficacy of SAR425899 in Patients with Type 2 
Diabetes Mellitus 
STUDY NUMBER: DRI13940 
VERSION DATE / STATUS: Approval date (23-Jan-2017) / Approved 
Protocol Amendment 01 
Version number: 1 (electronic 1.0) 
Date : 23-Jan-2017 
Clinical Trial Protocol 
Version number: 1 (electronic 2.0) 
Date : 17-Oct-2016 
EudraCT  
2016-001328-77 
IND Number(s) 
124931 
Version Number: 
1  
WHO universal trial  
Not applicable 
Date: 
23-Jan-2017
Total number of pages: 
128 
(electronic 1.0)
NCT02973321


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 2 
NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF 
COORDINATING 
INVESTIGATOR 
 
Name: 
Address: 
 
 
Tel: 
Fax: 
E-mail: 
 
 
MONITORING TEAM’S 
REPRESENTATIVE 
 
Name: 
Address: 
 
 
 
Tel: 
Fax: 
E-mail: 
 
 
SPONSOR 
 
Company: 
Address: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
OTHER EMERGENCY 
TELEPHONE NUMBERS 
 
 
 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 3 
CLINICAL TRIAL SUMMARY 
 
COMPOUND: SAR425899 
STUDY No.: DRI13940  
TITLE 
A 26-week Randomized, Double-blind, Placebo-controlled, 
Dose-ranging Phase 2 Study to Assess the Safety and Efficacy of 
SAR425899 in Patients with Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus 
INVESTIGATOR/TRIAL LOCATION 
Multinational 
PHASE OF DEVELOPMENT 
Phase 2 
STUDY OBJECTIVE(S) 
 
Primary objective: 
The primary objective of this study is to assess the dose-response 
relationship of SAR425899 versus placebo in terms of glycemic 
control as measured by the change in glycosylated hemoglobin 
(HbA1c) from baseline to Week 26. 
Secondary objectives: 
• 
To assess the effect of once daily dosing of SAR425899 
on body weight over 26 weeks. 
• 
To assess the safety and immunogenicity profile of 
SAR425899 when administered as daily subcutaneous 
(SC) injections over 26 weeks, including assessment of the 
heart rate (HR) change from baseline to Week 26 by 
electrocardiogram (ECG) and Holter monitor. 
• 
To assess the proportion of patients achieving predefined 
HbA1c targets of <7% and <6.5% as well as the proportion 
of patients achieving ≥5% and ≥10% body weight loss at 
Week 26. 
• 
To assess the effect of once daily dosing of SAR425899 
on additional parameters of glycemic control and lipid 
metabolism. 
• 
To assess the effect of once daily dosing of SAR425899 
on additional pharmacodynamic (PD) biomarkers. 
• 
To assess the pharmacokinetic (PK) profile and 
parameters of SAR425899, inter-individual and  
inter-occasion variability in PK parameters using a 
population PK approach. 
Exploratory objectives: 
• 
To assess and compare the safety and efficacy of 
SAR425899 versus open-label liraglutide from baseline to 
Week 26. 
• 
To explore SAR425899 PK/PD relationships for glycemic 
parameters, body weight loss and heart rate. 
• 
To assess the treatment effects in each group on  
patient-reported outcomes. 
• 
To assess the treatment effects in each group on 
nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH) and cardiovascular 
biomarkers. 
 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 4 
STUDY DESIGN 
This is a randomized, placebo-controlled, parallel-group study which 
is double-blind for SAR425899 versus placebo and open-label for 
the active control liraglutide. The volume of investigational medicinal 
product (IMP; ie, dose of SAR425899 or matching placebo) is not 
blinded. 
Patients will be assigned to 1 of the 7 treatment arms: 3 SAR425899 
treatment arms with 3 different dose levels (60 patients per arm), 
3 matching SAR425899 placebo treatment arms (10 patients per 
arm), and 1 liraglutide arm (active comparator arm with 60 patients).  
For the biostatistical analyses, data from the 3 SAR425899 placebo 
arms will be pooled into 1 placebo group (30 patients total). 
The randomization will be stratified by screening visit HbA1c (<8.0% 
versus ≥8.0%) and Visit 4 (Day 1) body mass index (BMI; 
<35.0 kg/m2 versus ≥35.0 kg/m2). 
Up to 50% of patients will perform additional assessments: meal test 
and Holter monitor. Full PK will be performed in a subset of 
40 patients. 
The study will include a 3-week screening period, a 26-week 
treatment period, and a 3-day post treatment follow-up period. 
In case of fasting plasma glucose (FPG) or HbA1c (assessed by 
central laboratory) above predefined thresholds and if no reasons 
can be found for insufficient glucose control, it is recommended to 
add rescue therapy. The choice of rescue therapy is at the 
Investigator’s discretion with the exception of using glucagon-like 
petide-1 (GLP-1) receptor agonists or dipeptidyl peptidase 4 (DPP4) 
inhibitors.  
Thresholds:  
• 
FPG >270 mg/dL (15.0 mmol/L) from baseline Visit 4 
(Week 0) to Visit 9 (Week 8, including value at Visit 9).  
• 
FPG >240 mg/dL (13.3 mmol/L) from Visit 9 (Week 8) to 
Visit 10 (Week 14). 
• 
FPG >200 mg/dL (11.1 mmol/L) or HbA1C >8% from 
Visit 10 (Week 14) to Visit 12 (Week 26). 
All assessments planned in Visit 12 are to be performed before 
initiating rescue therapy. After these assessments are completed 
and rescue therapy initiated, the patient will remain in the study and 
continue to administer the study treatment (including background 
therapy). The planned visits and assessments should be performed 
until the last scheduled visit. 
STUDY POPULATION  
Main selection criteria 
Inclusion criteria: 
• 
Patients with type-2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM) for at least 
3 months before the screening visit. 
• 
On diet/exercise and/or treatment with metformin (stable 
dose of ≥1500 mg/day or maximal tolerated dose) for at 
least 3 months prior to screening. 
• 
Signed informed consent. 
Exclusion criteria: 
• 
At screening, patient’s age < legal age of adulthood or 
>80 years. 
• 
HbA1c at screening visit <7.0% or >10.0%. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 5 
• 
BMI <25 kg/m2 or >45.0 kg/m2. 
• 
Pregnant or lactating women. 
• 
Women of childbearing potential (WOCBP) not protected 
by highly-effective method(s) of birth control and/or who 
are unwilling or unable to be tested for pregnancy (see 
contraceptive guidance in Appendix A). 
• 
Diagnosis of type-1 diabetes mellitus. 
• 
FPG >15 mmol/L (270 mg/dL) measured by the central 
laboratory at screening (Visit 1), and confirmed 
(>15 mmol/L [270 mg/dL]) by a repeat test before 
randomization.  
• 
Treatment with glucose-lowering agents(s) other than 
metformin, currently or within the 3 months prior to 
screening. 
• 
Previous insulin use, except for episode(s) of short-term 
treatment (≤15 consecutive days) for intercurrent illness or 
pregnancy, or use of insulin within the last 6 months. 
• 
Contraindication(s) to metformin use. 
• 
Contraindication(s) to liraglutide use. 
• 
Significant change in body weight in the 3 months before 
screening. 
• 
Poorly controlled hypertension (a resting systolic blood 
pressure [SBP] >160 mm Hg and/or diastolic blood 
pressure [DBP] >95 mm Hg at screening). 
• 
History of long QT syndrome and/or QTc more than 
450 ms at screening visit. 
• 
History of pancreatitis or pancreatectomy. 
• 
History of weight loss surgery. 
• 
Personal or immediate family history of medullary thyroid 
cancer (MTC) or genetic conditions that predispose to 
MTC. 
• 
Any prior exposure to drugs belonging to the class of 
GLP-1 receptor agonists or GLP-1 analogs. 
• 
Contraindications or known hypersensitivity reaction to 
glucagon. 
Total expected number of patients 
Approximately 270 randomized patients.  
Approximately 70 sites anticipated. 
STUDY TREATMENT(s) 
 
Investigational medicinal product(s) 
1. 
SAR425899 or its placebo (injection solution). 
2. 
Liraglutide as open-label comparator (injection solution). 
Formulation: 
1. 
Cartridges containing 3 mL solution for injection, at a 
concentration of 0.5 mg/mL SAR425899 or matching 
placebo. 
2. 
Pens prefilled with a 3-mL solution of 6 mg/ml liraglutide. 
Route(s) of administration: 
Tactipen® injector will be used to deliver SC doses of SAR425899 
and matching placebo.  Three (3) SAR425899 dose levels are 
planned.   
Prefilled, multidose pen will be used to deliver SC doses for 
liraglutide. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 6 
Dose regimen: 
Doses of SAR425899, placebo, and liraglutide should be injected in 
the morning at the same time every day except on clinic visit days. 
On clinic visit days, SAR425899, placebo and liraglutide injection 
time should be after blood tests/ECG measurement time in the 
morning and be coordinated with the meal test/PK sampling time.   
SAR425899 and matching placebo treatment regimens plan to 
include a 1 to 3-week dose increase period before the maintenance 
dose, as follows: 
• 
Low dose regimen: 1 dose increase step of 1 week (if no 
significant tolerability issues [for example, nausea and 
vomiting] are observed): 0.06 mg ie, 12U – 0.12 mg 
ie, 24U (0.12mg ie, 24U for 25 weeks). 
• 
Mid dose regimen: 2 dose increase steps of 1 week each 
(if no significant tolerability issues [for example, nausea 
and vomiting] are observed): 0.06 mg ie, 12U – 0.12 mg 
ie, 24U – 0.16 mg ie, 32U (0.16 mg ie, 32U for 24 weeks).  
• 
High dose regimen: 3 dose increase steps of 1 week each 
(if no significant tolerability issues [for example, nausea 
and vomiting] are observed): 0.06 mg ie, 12U – 0.12 mg 
ie, 24U – 0.16 mg ie, 32U – 0.20 mg ie, 40U (0.20 mg 
ie, 40U for 23 weeks) 
Liraglutide: 1.8 mg daily after dose increase (0.6 mg daily for 7 days 
followed by 1.2 mg daily for 7 days followed by 1.8 mg daily for  
24 weeks). 
Noninvestigational medicinal product(s) 
 
Formulation: 
Metformin background treatment: previous metformin treatment 
should be continued and kept stable for the duration of the study. 
Coated tablets or powder depending on formulation available in each 
country. 
Route(s) of administration: 
oral 
Dose regimen: 
≥1500 mg daily stable dose or maximal tolerated dose. 
ENDPOINT(S) 
 
Primary endpoint: 
• 
Change in HbA1c from baseline to Week 26. 
Secondary endpoints: 
• 
Secondary efficacy endpoints: 
- 
Change in body weight from baseline to Week 26, 
- 
Percentage of patients achieving predefined HbA1c 
targets of <7% and <6.5% at Week 26, 
- 
Percentage of patients achieving ≥5% and ≥10% 
body weight loss at Week 26, 
- 
Change in FPG from baseline to Week 26, 
- 
Change in 7-point self-measured plasma glucose 
(SMPG) profile from baseline to Week 26 (each time 
point and mean daily value), 
- 
Change in postprandial plasma glucose (PPG) in 
response to a standardized meal test in up to 50% 
subset of all patients from baseline to Week 26 at 
time points premeal, 10min, 20min, 0.5h, 1h, 1.5h, 2h, 
3h, 4h post meal, and associated glucose excursion 
values at these time points, 
- 
Percentage of patients requiring rescue therapy 
during 26-week treatment period, 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 7 
- 
Change in fasting insulin, proinsulin, and C-peptide 
from baseline to Week 26, change in postprandial 
insulin, proinsulin and C-peptide in response to a 
standardized meal test in up to 50% subset of all 
patients from baseline to Week 26 at time points 
premeal, 10min, 20min, 0.5h, 1h, 1.5h, 2h, 3h, 4h 
post meal, and associated excursion values for each 
of the above parameters values at these time points, 
- 
Change in β-cell function assessed by HOMA-β from 
baseline to Week 26, 
- 
Change in insulin resistance assessed by HOMA-IR 
from baseline to Week 26, 
- 
Change in fasting lipid profile (total cholesterol, 
triglycerides, LDL-C, and HDL-C), free fatty acids, and 
ketone bodies from baseline to Week 26, 
- 
Change in PD biomarkers (including waist 
circumference, hip circumference, waist to hip ratio, 
VAS for appetite/satiety score related to meal test, 
and to assess fasting levels of adiponectin) from 
baseline to Week 26. 
• 
Safety: 
- 
Adverse events (AEs), serious adverse events (SAEs) 
and adverse events of special interest (AESIs), 
hypoglycemia (severe, documented, asymptomatic, 
probable, relative), vital signs, ECG changes, and 
safety laboratory values, 
- 
Change of heart rate from baseline to Week 26 by 
ECG, 
- 
Change of heart rate from baseline to Week 26 by 
Holter monitor in up to 50% subset of all patients, 
- 
Antibody assessments: anti-SAR425899 antibodies 
samples will be collected in all patients (except 
patients on Liraglutide) at baseline, Week 2, Week 4, 
Week 14, and Week 26 before dosing. Patients will 
be asked to provide sample for anti-SAR425899 
antibodies assessments 3 months after the end of the 
study if needed.  
• 
Pharmacokinetics: 
- 
Basic PK parameters include CL/F, Vz/F and t1/2, and 
variability in PK (inter- individual and inter-occasion) 
will be assessed using population PK approach.  For 
that purpose, blood samples for plasma SAR425899 
determination will be collected at 2 different occasions 
after the end of the dose increase phase in 
40 patients  in total of SAR425899/placebo arm 
according to the following schedule: 
- 
Predose, 2h, 4h, 6h, 8h, 12h and 24h postdose on 
2 different occasions, Week 14 and Week 26, 
- 
In addition to the full PK sampling scheduled, sparse 
PK sampling will be done in the remaining subset of 
patients in each SAR425899/placebo arm conducted 
also at Weeks 14 and 26.  Sparse sampling schedule 
is predose and 6h postdose. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 8 
Exploratory endpoints: 
• 
Change in NASH biomarkers and cardiovascular 
biomarkers from baseline to Week 26. 
• 
Exploratory PK/PD analysis will be performed in 
SAR425899 and matching placebo patients using glycemic 
parameters (HbA1c, FPG, PPG) excursion in response to 
a standardized meal test, body weight, and heart rate. 
• 
Patient-reported outcome endpoints: 
- 
Change from baseline at Week 26 in: 
- 
Weight-Related Symptoms Measure (WRSM), 
- 
Ability to Perform Physical Activities of Daily Living 
(APPADL), 
- 
Impact of Weight on self-perception (IW-SP), 
- 
Patient’s qualitative self-assessment of treatment. 
ASSESSMENT SCHEDULE 
The schedule of study-related procedures/assessments is detailed in 
the Study Flowchart. 
STATISTICAL CONSIDERATIONS 
 
Sample size determination:  
For the primary endpoint of change in HbA1c from baseline to 
Week 26, a sample size of 60 patients per arm of SAR425899 and 
30 patients in the placebo group (pool of the 3 placebo arms) will 
provide 80% power to detect a difference of 0.7% in the HbA1c 
change from baseline to Week 26 between a dose group of 
SAR425899 and placebo (standard deviation [SD] 1.1%; 
5% significance level 2-sided). 
The total sample size will be 270 patients to be randomized over 
7 arms (3 SAR425899 dose arms of 60 patients each, 3 matching 
placebo arms with a total of 30 patients [10 patients per arm], and 
1 active comparator arm of liraglutide 1.8 mg of 60 patients). 
Analysis population: 
The primary efficacy population will be the intent-to-treat (ITT) 
population, which includes all randomized patients. Patients will be 
analyzed in efficacy analyses by the treatment group to which they 
are randomized by Interactive Response Technology (IRT) (as 
randomized). 
Safety analyses will be based on the safety population, defined as all 
randomized patients who receive at least 1 dose of IMP. Patients will 
be analyzed for safety analyses according to the treatment actually 
received.  For a patient randomized to a SAR425899 treatment arm, 
the patient will be analyzed in the treatment he/she receives starting 
Week 8 visit (inclusive) when no adjustment of dose level is allowed. 
However, for a patient randomized to a SAR425899 treatment arm 
and discontinues the IMP before Week 8 visit, the patient will be 
analyzed in the SAR425899 treatment arm the patient is randomized 
to. If a patient is exposed to more than one dose level of SAR425899 
since Week 8 visit or later, then the patient will be analyzed in the 
lowest dose level that the patient is exposed from Week 8 visit or 
later. If a patient is treated with both placebo and SAR425899 any 
time during the study, the patient will be analyzed in the SAR425899 
treatment arm.  Liraglutide patients will be included in the Liraglutide 
treatment arm regardless of dose amount patients receive. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 9 
Primary endpoint analysis: 
The primary efficacy endpoint of change in HbA1c from baseline to 
Week 26 will be analyzed with missing values imputed by  
Control-based multiple imputation method under the missing not at 
random frame work. 
• 
For placebo group patients, missing data will be imputed 
based on the placebo group data. 
• 
For patients in the SAR425899 groups, missing data will 
be imputed as if the patients were on placebo group 
throughout the study. 
Each of the complete dataset will be analyzed by the Analysis of 
Covariance (ANCOVA) model with treatment groups (SAR425899 
0.12 mg, SAR425899 0.16 mg, SAR425899 0.20 mg, placebo and 
liraglutide), randomization strata of screening HbA1c value (<8, 
≥8 %), randomization strata of Visit 4 (Day 1) BMI (<35.0 kg/m2, 
≥35.0 kg/m2), and country as fixed effects, and baseline HbA1c 
value as a covariate. Results from each complete dataset will be 
combined to provide the adjusted mean change in HbA1c from 
baseline to Week 26 for each treatment group, as well as the 
between-group difference (comparing each SAR425899 dose group 
versus placebo) and the 95% confidence interval (CI) for the 
difference. 
HbA1c values at baseline and Week 26 (observed or imputed) 
regardless of treatment discontinuation or initiation of rescue therapy 
will be used. 
Analysis of secondary endpoints: 
Analysis of secondary efficacy endpoints: 
All continuous secondary efficacy endpoints at Week 26 will be 
analyzed using the same ANCOVA model with missing values 
imputed by Control-based multiple imputation method. Means and 
adjusted means of each treatment group will be provided, as well as 
adjusted mean and associated two-sided 95% CI of the differences 
between each SAR425899 dose group and placebo group. The 
analyses include values at baseline and Week 26 (observed or 
imputed) regardless of treatment discontinuation or initiation of 
rescue therapy. 
All categorical secondary efficacy endpoints will be analyzed using a 
Cochran-Mantel-Haenszel (CMH) method stratified on randomization 
strata. The proportion in each treatment group will be provided, as 
well as the difference of proportions between each SAR425899 dose 
group and placebo with associated 2-sided 95% CI. For HbA1c and 
body weight responders, all values at Week 26 will be used to 
determine whether a patient is a responder or not, even if they are 
measured after IMP discontinuation or rescue medication use. 
Patients who have no measurement at Week 26 will be treated as 
non-responders. 
For percentage of patients requiring rescue therapy, patients who 
have received rescue therapy during the 26-week treatment period 
will be summarized. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 10 
 
Safety analysis 
Safety analyses for the 26-week treatment period will be descriptive, 
based on the safety population (randomized and exposed).  
Treatment-emergent adverse events (TEAEs) are defined as AEs 
that developed or worsened or became serious during the period 
from the administration of first dose of the study treatments up to 
3 days after the last administration. 
Interim analysis 
An interim analysis for body weight will be conducted when 
108 patients (about 24 patients per dose arm of SAR425899 and 
liraglutide and 12 patients from the SAR425899 placebo arm) have 
been randomized and completed 14 weeks of treatment. Descriptive 
statistics will be used to summarize the body weight results and the 
changes from baseline by visit for each treatment group. Potentially 
an interim analysis for PK/PD will be conducted when 60% of 
patients have completed the end of treatment visit. An internal 
sponsor team, independent of the study team, will perform the 
analysis, which is for internal project planning purposes. It will not 
lead to changes in the conduct of this protocol.  Only those 
necessary for the analysis and project planning will have the access 
to the interim analysis results before study completion.  Study team 
and investigational sites will continue to be blinded to individual 
randomization codes except for the open-label liraglutide until after 
study completion and database lock. 
DURATION OF STUDY PERIOD (per 
patient)  
The study duration is approximately 30 weeks (3-week screening 
period, 26-week treatment period, 3-day post treatment follow-up 
period). 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940 
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 11 
1 
FLOW CHARTS 
1.1 
GRAPHICAL STUDY DESIGN 
 
(electronic 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940 
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 12 
1.2 
STUDY FLOW CHART 
 
Treatment period 
 
Screening 
period 
Dose increase phase 
depending on IMP 
dose regimen 
Maintenance Dose Phase 
Follow-up 
period 
VISIT 
1 
2 
3 
4 BL 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
10 
11 
12 
EOTa 
13 
WEEK 
-3 
-2 
-1 
0 
1 
2 
3 
4 
8 
14 
20 
26 
3 day FU 
Phone visit 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Start of maintenance dose 
 
 
 
 
Low 
dose 
Mid 
dose 
High 
dose 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Informed consent 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Inclusion criteria 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Sub-study informed consent 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Exclusion criteria 
X 
X 
X 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Patient demography 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Medical/surgical history 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Alcohol and smoking history 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Medication history 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Vital signs (blood pressure [sitting], heart 
rate [supine]) 
X 
 
X 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
 
Height without shoes 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Body weightb 
X 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
 
Physical examination  
X 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
Xc 
X 
 
X 
 
Injection training/instruction (to be repeated 
as needed throughout the study) 
X 
X 
X 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
X 
X 
X 
 
 
Diary training and dispensed 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Glucometer training and dispense 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Check SMPG technique (training as needed 
throughout the study) 
 
X 
X 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
X 
X 
X 
 
 
Diet and lifestyle counseling 
 
 
Xe 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
Randomization 
 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Interactive Response Technology (IRT) 
contact 
X 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
Dispense of Tactipen f 
 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(electronic 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940 
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 13 
Treatment period 
 
Screening 
period 
Dose increase phase 
depending on IMP 
dose regimen 
Maintenance Dose Phase 
Follow-up 
period 
VISIT 
1 
2 
3 
4 BL 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
10 
11 
12 
EOTa 
13 
WEEK 
-3 
-2 
-1 
0 
1 
2 
3 
4 
8 
14 
20 
26 
3 day FU 
Phone visit 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Start of maintenance dose 
 
 
 
 
Low 
dose 
Mid 
dose 
High 
dose 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Dispense IMP 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
X 
X 
X 
 
 
IMP administration 
 
 
 
Xg 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
 
Compliance: count returned IMPs 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
 
Concomitant medication 
X 
 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
7-point glucose profile (SMPG) 
 
 
 
Xh 
 
 
 
 
 
Xh 
 
Xh 
 
12-lead ECG 
X 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
 
Holter monitori 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
Waist and hip measurements 
 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
Standardized meal test with Visual Analog 
Scale for Appetite/Satiety (VAS)j  
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
Laboratory testing (central lab) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
24h urine free-cortisol and creatininek 
 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
HbA1c 
X 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
 
Fasting Plasma Glucose 
X 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
 
Fasting insulin for calculation of HOMA-β, 
HOMA-IR 
 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
Women only : Estradiol and FSH test (if 
necessary to confirm postmenopausal 
status) 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Women only : pregnancy testl 
X 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
Viral Serology (hepatitis) 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Hematologym 
X 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
 
Liver function testn 
X 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
 
Renal function testo 
X 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
 
Blood electrolytesp 
X 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
 
(electronic 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940 
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 14 
Treatment period 
 
Screening 
period 
Dose increase phase 
depending on IMP 
dose regimen 
Maintenance Dose Phase 
Follow-up 
period 
VISIT 
1 
2 
3 
4 BL 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
10 
11 
12 
EOTa 
13 
WEEK 
-3 
-2 
-1 
0 
1 
2 
3 
4 
8 
14 
20 
26 
3 day FU 
Phone visit 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Start of maintenance dose 
 
 
 
 
Low 
dose 
Mid 
dose 
High 
dose 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Lipid panel (including free fatty acid) 
X 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
Ketone bodies 
 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
 
Fasting level of adiponectin 
 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
Amylase/lipase 
X 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
 
Calcitonin 
X 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
 
Thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH) /Total 
triiodothyronine (T3) /Free Thyroxine (FT4) 
 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
Urinalysisq 
X 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
Urine albumin/creatinine ratio assessment 
(to be done on first morning urine sample) 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Anti-SAR425899 antibodiesr 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
 
X 
 
PK samplings 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
X 
 
Exploratory biomarkers 
 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
PRO questionnaires (WRSM, APPADL, IW-
SP) 
 
 
 
X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
PRO qualitative questionst 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
X 
 
AE/SAE reporting 
To be assessed and reported throughout the study 
Hypoglycemia reporting 
To be assessed and reported throughout the study 
a In case of rescue therapy, all assessments planned in V12 should be performed before starting rescue therapy, patients then continue the study treatment (including metformin), and all visits and assessments 
should be performed as scheduled.  In case of premature permanent IMP discontinuation, patients should have a visit as soon as possible with the assessments normally planned in V12 (the standardized meal 
test and PK collections are performed only if the patient receives the IMP the day of the visit, note that otherwise predose PK sample can be taken if the patient receives the IMP the day before). Afterward, the 
patients should continue in the study up to the scheduled date of study completion. They should be followed up according to the study procedures as specified in the protocol (except for the 3 day safety post-
treatment and PK assessment). If the patient drops out from the study at the time of IMP discontinuation regardless if the patient receives the IMP or not on the day of the meal test, the meal test should be 
performed. However, PK collections are performed only if the patient receives the IMP the day of the visit, otherwise predose PK sample can be taken if the patient receives the IMP the day before. 
b Weight will be recorded to the nearest 0.1 kg and should be measured using calibrated scales.  The same pair of scales should preferably be used throughout the trial.  Weight should be measured in the fasting 
state in the morning at approximately the same time with an empty bladder, without shoes and only wearing undergarments or light clothing.  Weight measured at screening Visit 1 will be used only for calculation 
of screening BMI for eligibility criteria whereas weight measured at Visit 4 will be used as baseline for assessment of change in body weight and for calculation of baseline BMI which will be the BMI value used for 
stratification. 
(electronic 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940 
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 15 
c At Visit 9, abbreviated/targeted physical examination only. 
d Diary will be reviewed at each on site visit. 
e Counseling will be provided at screening Visit 3 or Visit 4. 
f 
Only for patients in SAR425899 or Placebo arms. 
g First dose of IMP will be done on-site .IMP administration every day along the 26-weeks, but at each visit on site, the IMP administration will be done on site by the patient himself. 
h 7-point profile to be conducted over a single 24-hour period in the week before Visit 4, Visit 10 and Visit 12. 
i 
24 hour Holter monitoring to be performed in a subset of patients. 
j 
Standardized meal test to be performed in a subset of patient. 
k Containers will be provided at V3 and V11, the patient should collect his/her urine for the 24 hours prior to V4 and V12 and brig the container to the visit 
l 
Serum pregnancy test should be done at screening and Week 26; serum or urine pregnancy test may be used at other timepoints.  A positive urine pregnancy test should be confirmed with a serum test. 
m Blood count (erythrocytes, hemoglobin, hematocrit, leukocytes), differential blood count (neutrophils, lymphocytes, monocytes, eosinophils, basophils) and platelets. 
n Total bilirubin (and, in case of values above the normal range, differentiation in conjugated and nonconjugated bilirubin), aspartate aminotransferase (AST), alanine aminotransferase (ALT), alkaline phosphatase 
(ALP), gamma-glutamyl transpeptidase (GGT). 
o Creatinine, Cystatin C, uric acid. 
p Sodium, potassium, calcium, phosphorus. 
q By central lab to include pH, glucose, ketones, leukocytes, blood, protein, nitrite, urobilinogen, bilirubin. 
r 
Not for patients in the liraglutide arm. 
s Full PK sampling in 40 patients in total in SAR425899/placebo cohort conducted at Weeks 14 and 26.  Sampling schedule as follows: Predose, 2h, 4h, 6h, 8h, 12h and 24h postdose.  Patients who will have full 
sampling will need to return the next day for the 24 hour timepoint. Sparse PK sampling to be done in the remaining subset of subjects in each SAR425899/placebo cohort conducted also at weeks 14 and 26.  
Sparse sampling schedule is pre-dose and 6h post-dose. 
t 
Patient’s qualitative self-assessment of the treatment.
(electronic 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 16 
2 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
AMENDED CLINICAL TRIAL PROTOCOL NO. 01.......................................................................................1 
1 
FLOW CHARTS.............................................................................................................................11 
1.1 
GRAPHICAL STUDY DESIGN ......................................................................................................11 
1.2 
STUDY FLOW CHART ..................................................................................................................12 
2 
TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................16 
2.1 
LIST OF TABLES...........................................................................................................................22 
2.2 
LIST OF FIGURES.........................................................................................................................22 
3 
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS ..........................................................................................................23 
4 
INTRODUCTION AND RATIONALE.............................................................................................25 
5 
STUDY OBJECTIVES ...................................................................................................................27 
5.1 
PRIMARY.......................................................................................................................................27 
5.2 
SECONDARY ................................................................................................................................27 
5.3 
EXPLORATORY OBJECTIVE .......................................................................................................27 
6 
STUDY DESIGN ............................................................................................................................28 
6.1 
DESCRIPTION OF THE STUDY...................................................................................................28 
6.2 
DURATION OF STUDY PARTICIPATION ....................................................................................28 
6.2.1 
Duration of study participation for each patient .............................................................................28 
6.2.2 
Determination of end of clinical trial (all patients) ..........................................................................29 
6.3 
INTERIM ANALYSIS......................................................................................................................29 
6.4 
STUDY COMMITTEES..................................................................................................................29 
6.4.1 
Pancreatic Safety Assessment Committee....................................................................................29 
6.4.2 
Cardiovascular adjudication committee .........................................................................................29 
6.4.3 
Data monitoring committee ............................................................................................................29 
7 
SELECTION OF PATIENTS..........................................................................................................30 
7.1 
INCLUSION CRITERIA..................................................................................................................30 
7.2 
EXCLUSION CRITERIA ................................................................................................................30 
7.2.1 
Exclusion criteria related to study methodology ............................................................................30 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 17 
7.2.2 
Exclusion criteria related to the active comparator and/or background therapies.........................33 
7.2.3 
Exclusion criteria related to the current knowledge of Sanofi compound......................................33 
8 
STUDY TREATMENTS .................................................................................................................35 
8.1 
INVESTIGATIONAL MEDICINAL PRODUCTS.............................................................................35 
8.1.1 
SAR425899 or matching placebo (solution for injection)...............................................................35 
8.1.2 
Liraglutide.......................................................................................................................................36 
8.1.3 
Injection device and training ..........................................................................................................36 
8.2 
NONINVESTIGATIONAL MEDICINAL PRODUCTS.....................................................................37 
8.2.1 
Background treatment....................................................................................................................37 
8.2.1.1 
Metformin .......................................................................................................................................37 
8.2.1.2 
Diet and exercise ...........................................................................................................................37 
8.3 
BLINDING PROCEDURES............................................................................................................37 
8.3.1 
Methods of blinding........................................................................................................................37 
8.3.2 
Randomization code breaking during the study.............................................................................38 
8.4 
METHOD OF ASSIGNING PATIENTS TO TREATMENT GROUP ..............................................38 
8.5 
PACKAGING AND LABELING ......................................................................................................40 
8.6 
STORAGE CONDITIONS AND SHELF LIFE................................................................................40 
8.6.1 
SAR425899 0.5 mg/ml or placebo.................................................................................................40 
8.6.2 
Liraglutide (Victoza) .......................................................................................................................40 
8.7 
RESPONSIBILITIES ......................................................................................................................41 
8.7.1 
Treatment accountability and compliance......................................................................................41 
8.7.2 
Return and/or destruction of treatments ........................................................................................41 
8.8 
CONCOMITANT MEDICATION.....................................................................................................42 
8.8.1 
Prohibited medications...................................................................................................................42 
8.8.2 
Rescue therapy..............................................................................................................................42 
9 
ASSESSMENT OF INVESTIGATIONAL MEDICINAL PRODUCT ..............................................44 
9.1 
PRIMARY ENDPOINT ...................................................................................................................44 
9.1.1 
Primary efficacy endpoint...............................................................................................................44 
9.1.1.1 
Observation period of the primary efficacy endpoint .....................................................................44 
9.1.1.2 
Assessment method.......................................................................................................................44 
9.2 
SECONDARY ENDPOINTS ..........................................................................................................44 
9.2.1 
Secondary efficacy endpoints........................................................................................................44 
9.2.1.1 
Observation period of secondary efficacy endpoints.....................................................................45 
9.2.1.2 
Assessment methods.....................................................................................................................45 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 18 
9.2.2 
Safety endpoints ............................................................................................................................48 
9.2.2.1 
Observation period of safety endpoints .........................................................................................49 
9.2.2.2 
Adverse events ..............................................................................................................................49 
9.2.2.3 
Hypoglycemia.................................................................................................................................49 
9.2.2.4 
Laboratory safety variables............................................................................................................49 
9.2.2.5 
Vital signs and physical examination .............................................................................................50 
9.2.2.6 
Electrocardiogram variables ..........................................................................................................50 
9.2.2.7 
Anti-SAR425899 antibody assessment .........................................................................................51 
9.3 
OTHER ENDPOINTS.....................................................................................................................52 
9.3.1 
Pharmacokinetics...........................................................................................................................52 
9.3.1.1 
Sampling time ................................................................................................................................52 
9.3.1.2 
Pharmacokinetics handling procedure...........................................................................................53 
9.3.1.3 
Bioanalytical method......................................................................................................................53 
9.3.1.4 
Pharmacokinetics parameters .......................................................................................................54 
9.3.2 
Pharmacogenetic assessment.......................................................................................................54 
9.3.3 
Exploratory variables......................................................................................................................54 
9.3.3.1 
Change in NASH and cardiovascular biomarkers .........................................................................54 
9.3.3.2 
Exploratory pharmacokinetic/pharmacodynamic analysis.............................................................54 
9.3.4 
Quality of life/health economic variables/other endpoints..............................................................54 
9.4 
FUTURE USE OF SAMPLES ........................................................................................................56 
9.5 
APPROPRIATENESS OF MEASUREMENTS ..............................................................................56 
10 
STUDY PROCEDURES ................................................................................................................57 
10.1 
VISIT SCHEDULE..........................................................................................................................57 
10.1.1 
Screening Period (Week -3 to Week 0) .........................................................................................57 
10.1.1.1 On-site Visit 1 (Week -3, screening visit).......................................................................................58 
10.1.1.2 On site Visit 2 (Week -2, screening visit) .......................................................................................59 
10.1.1.3 On site Visit 3 (Week -1, screening visit) .......................................................................................59 
10.1.2 
Twenty-six-week double-blind treatment period ............................................................................60 
10.1.2.2 Follow up period phone call Visit 13 (3 days FU) ..........................................................................68 
10.1.3 
Unscheduled visits .........................................................................................................................68 
10.2 
DEFINITION OF SOURCE DATA..................................................................................................70 
10.2.1 
Source data to be found in the patient’s file...................................................................................70 
10.2.2 
Source data verification requirements for screen failures .............................................................71 
10.3 
HANDLING OF PATIENT TEMPORARY OR PERMANENT TREATMENT 
DISCONTINUATION AND OF PATIENT STUDY DISCONTINUATION.......................................71 
10.3.1 
Temporary treatment discontinuation with investigational medicinal product(s) ...........................71 
10.3.2 
Permanent treatment discontinuation with investigational medicinal product(s) ...........................71 
10.3.3 
List of criteria for permanent treatment discontinuation.................................................................71 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 19 
10.3.4 
Procedure and consequence for patient withdrawal from study....................................................72 
10.4 
OBLIGATION OF THE INVESTIGATOR REGARDING SAFETY REPORTING ..........................73 
10.4.1 
Definitions of adverse events.........................................................................................................73 
10.4.1.1 Adverse event ................................................................................................................................73 
10.4.1.2 Serious adverse event ...................................................................................................................73 
10.4.1.3 Adverse event of special interest...................................................................................................74 
10.4.2 
Serious adverse events waived from expedited regulatory reporting to regulatory 
authorities.......................................................................................................................................75 
10.4.3 
General guidelines for reporting adverse events ...........................................................................75 
10.4.4 
Instructions for reporting serious adverse events ..........................................................................76 
10.4.5 
Guidelines for reporting adverse events of special interest...........................................................76 
10.4.6 
Guidelines for management of specific laboratory abnormalities ..................................................77 
10.5 
OBLIGATIONS OF THE SPONSOR .............................................................................................78 
10.6 
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS .............................................................................................................78 
10.6.1 
Hypoglycemia.................................................................................................................................78 
10.6.2 
Local tolerability at injection site ....................................................................................................79 
10.6.3 
Allergic or allergic-like reaction ......................................................................................................79 
10.6.4 
Monitoring of patients with increased lipase and/or amylase >2 ULN...........................................80 
10.6.4.1 Elevation of amylase and/or lipase >2 ULN without clinical signs and/or symptoms ....................80 
10.6.4.2 Elevation of amylase and/or lipase >2 ULN with clinical signs and/or symptoms .........................80 
10.6.5 
Major Cardiovascular events .........................................................................................................81 
10.6.6 
Management of patients with increased calcitonin values.............................................................81 
10.6.7 
Monitoring of renal function in case of prolonged and severe nausea and vomiting.....................82 
10.6.8 
Follow-up of laboratory abnormalities............................................................................................82 
10.7 
ADVERSE EVENTS MONITORING..............................................................................................82 
11 
STATISTICAL CONSIDERATIONS..............................................................................................83 
11.1 
DETERMINATION OF SAMPLE SIZE...........................................................................................83 
11.2 
DISPOSITION OF PATIENTS .......................................................................................................83 
11.3 
ANALYSIS POPULATIONS...........................................................................................................84 
11.3.1 
Efficacy populations .......................................................................................................................84 
11.3.1.1 Intent-to-treat population................................................................................................................84 
11.3.2 
Safety population ...........................................................................................................................84 
11.3.3 
Pharmacokinetic population...........................................................................................................85 
11.3.4 
Patient-reported outcome population.............................................................................................85 
11.4 
STATISTICAL METHODS .............................................................................................................85 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 20 
11.4.1 
Extent of study treatment exposure and compliance.....................................................................85 
11.4.1.1 Extent of investigational medicinal product exposure....................................................................85 
11.4.1.2 Compliance ....................................................................................................................................86 
11.4.2 
Analyses of efficacy endpoints.......................................................................................................86 
11.4.2.1 Analysis of primary efficacy endpoint(s) ........................................................................................86 
11.4.2.2 Analyses of secondary efficacy endpoints.....................................................................................87 
11.4.2.3 Multiplicity considerations ..............................................................................................................88 
11.4.3 
Analyses of safety data..................................................................................................................89 
11.4.3.1 Analyses of hypoglycemia .............................................................................................................90 
11.4.3.2 Analyses of adverse events ...........................................................................................................90 
11.4.3.3 Analyses of laboratory variables....................................................................................................93 
11.4.3.4 Analyses of vital sign variables ......................................................................................................93 
11.4.3.5 Analyses of 12 lead electrocardiogram status ...............................................................................94 
11.4.3.6 Analyses of antidrug antibody variables ........................................................................................94 
11.4.4 
Analyses of pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic variables ....................................................94 
11.4.4.1 Analyses of pharmacokinetic variables..........................................................................................94 
11.4.4.2 Analysis of the pharmacodynamics variables................................................................................95 
11.4.5 
Analyses of patient reported outcomes (health-related quality of life/health economics 
variables)........................................................................................................................................95 
11.4.5.1 Analysis of PRO questionnaires (WRSM, APPADL and IW-SP)...................................................95 
11.4.5.2 Analysis of the patient qualitative assessment of the treatment....................................................95 
11.5 
INTERIM ANALYSIS......................................................................................................................95 
12 
ETHICAL AND REGULATORY CONSIDERATIONS...................................................................97 
12.1 
ETHICAL AND REGULATORY STANDARDS ..............................................................................97 
12.2 
INFORMED CONSENT .................................................................................................................97 
12.3 
HEALTH AUTHORITIES AND INSTITUTIONAL REVIEW BOARD/INDEPENDENT 
ETHICS COMMITTEE ...................................................................................................................97 
13 
STUDY MONITORING...................................................................................................................99 
13.1 
RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE INVESTIGATOR(S).......................................................................99 
13.2 
RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE SPONSOR.....................................................................................99 
13.3 
SOURCE DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................100 
13.4 
USE AND COMPLETION OF CASE REPORT FORMS (CRFS) AND ADDITIONAL 
REQUEST....................................................................................................................................100 
13.5 
USE OF COMPUTERIZED SYSTEMS........................................................................................100 
14 
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................101 
14.1 
CURRICULUM VITAE..................................................................................................................101 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 21 
14.2 
RECORD RETENTION IN STUDY SITES ..................................................................................101 
14.3 
CONFIDENTIALITY .....................................................................................................................101 
14.4 
PROPERTY RIGHTS...................................................................................................................102 
14.5 
DATA PROTECTION...................................................................................................................102 
14.6 
INSURANCE COMPENSATION..................................................................................................102 
14.7 
SPONSOR AUDITS AND INSPECTIONS BY REGULATORY AGENCIES ...............................103 
14.8 
PREMATURE DISCONTINUATION OF THE STUDY OR PREMATURE CLOSE-OUT OF 
A SITE..........................................................................................................................................103 
14.8.1 
By the Sponsor.............................................................................................................................103 
14.8.2 
By the Investigator .......................................................................................................................104 
14.8.3 
Clinical trial results .......................................................................................................................104 
14.9 
PUBLICATIONS AND COMMUNICATIONS ...............................................................................104 
15 
CLINICAL TRIAL PROTOCOL AMENDMENTS ........................................................................105 
16 
BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES...............................................................................................106 
17 
APPENDICES..............................................................................................................................108 
APPENDIX A 
GUIDANCE ON CONTRACEPTIVE METHODS AND COLLECTION OF 
PREGNANCY INFORMATION....................................................................................................109 
APPENDIX B 
DOCUMENT(S) RELATED TO THE ASSESSMENT OF 1 (OR MORE) 
ENDPOINT(S)..............................................................................................................................115 
APPENDIX C GENERAL GUIDANCE FOR THE FOLLOW-UP OF LABORATORY 
ABNORMALITIES BY SANOFI....................................................................................................124 
 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 22 
2.1 
LIST OF TABLES 
Table 1 - List of treatment kits .......................................................................................................................40 
Table 2 - Sampling schedule for glucose, insulin, proinsulin and C peptide in response to a standardized 
meal test in up to 50% subset of all patients.................................................................................................46 
Table 3 - Sampling schedule for Full PK in 40 patients in total under SAR425899 or placebo....................53 
Table 4 - Sampling schedule for Sparse PK in patients under SAR425899 or placebo not involved in the 
Full PK sampling............................................................................................................................................53 
Table 5 - Pharmacokinetics handling for SAR425899 ..................................................................................53 
Table 6 - Summary of adverse event reporting instructions..........................................................................77 
 
2.2 
LIST OF FIGURES 
Figure 1 - The step-down testing procedure .................................................................................................89 
 
 
 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 23 
3 
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS 
 
AE: 
adverse event 
AESI: 
adverse event of special interest 
ALP: 
alkaline phosphatase 
ALT: 
alanine transaminase 
ANCOVA: 
analysis of covariance 
APPADL: 
ability to perform physical activities of daily living 
AST: 
aspartate aminotransferase 
BMI: 
body mass index 
BNP: 
brain natriuretic peptide 
CAC: 
Cardiovascular events Adjudication Committee 
CI: 
confidence interval 
CMH: 
Cochran-Mantel-Haenszel 
CRF: 
case report form 
DBP: 
diastolic blood pressure 
DMC: 
Data Monitoring Committee 
DRF: 
discrepancy resolution form 
ECG: 
electrocardiogram 
eCRF: 
electronic case report form 
EE: 
energy expenditure 
eGFR: 
estimated glomerular filtration rate 
FPG: 
fasting plasma glucose 
GGT: 
gamma-glutamyl transpeptidase 
GLP-1: 
glucagon-like peptide-1 
HbA1c: 
glycosylated hemoglobin 
HLGT: 
high-level group term 
HLT: 
high level term 
HR: 
heart rate 
hs-CRP: 
high-sensitivity C-reactive protein 
IEC: 
independent ethics committee 
IMP: 
investigational medicinal product 
IRB: 
institutional review board 
IRT: 
Interactive Response Technology 
ITT: 
intent-to-treat 
IW-SP: 
Impact of Weight on self-perception 
LC-MS/MS: 
liquid chromatography with tandem mass spectrometry 
LLOQ: 
lower limit of quantification 
MDRD: 
modification of diet in renal disease 
MedDRA: 
Medical Dictionary for Regulatory Activities 
NASH: 
nonalcoholic steatohepatitis 
NIMP: 
noninvestigational medicinal product 
OC: 
observed case 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 24 
OXM: 
oxyntomodulin 
PCSA: 
potentially clinically significant abnormality 
PD: 
pharmacodynamic 
PK: 
pharmacokinetic 
PPG: 
postprandial plasma glucose 
PRO: 
patient-reported outcome 
PSAC: 
Pancreatic Safety Assessment Committee 
PT: 
preferred term 
PTC: 
product technical complaint 
SAE: 
serious adverse event 
SBP: 
systolic blood pressure 
SC: 
subcutaneous 
SMPG: 
self-measured plasma glucose 
SOC: 
system organ class 
SUSAR: 
suspected unexpected serious adverse reaction 
T2DM: 
type-2 diabetes mellitus 
TEAE: 
treatment-emergent adverse event 
ULN: 
upper limit of the normal laboratory range 
WRSM: 
weight-related symptoms measure 
 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 25 
4 
INTRODUCTION AND RATIONALE 
Glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1) is an endogenous enteroendocrine hormone secreted by L-cells 
of the distal intestine in response to oral nutrient ingestion.  Glucagon-like peptide-1 has multiple 
physiologic effects that contribute to ameliorating hyperglycemia in the treatment of type-2 
diabetes mellitus (T2DM).  These effects include enhancing insulin secretion from pancreatic  
β-cells in a glucose dependent manner, suppressing glucagon secretion, and slowing gastric 
emptying (1).  Glucagon-like peptide-1 also enhances satiety with subsequent reduction in food 
intake thereby promoting weight loss.  About 80% of patients with T2DM are overweight or 
obese.  Many of the available classes of treatment options for T2DM (eg, sulfonylureas, glinides, 
thiazolidenediones, and insulin) are actually associated with promoting weight gain, a distressing 
side effect for patients already struggling with excess body weight and one that may adversely 
impact adherence to therapy (2).  In recent years, a new class of pharmacotherapy for T2DM has 
emerged in the form of GLP-1 receptor agonists, which are notable for promoting modest weight 
loss in addition to having insulinotropic actions and glycemic efficacy. 
Another enteroendocrine hormone that has gained interest as a potential therapeutic option for the 
treatment of obesity/T2DM is oxyntomodulin (OXM).  Like GLP-1, OXM is secreted by L-cells 
of the distal gut and is also derived from the same precursor peptide proglucagon.  
Oxyntomodulin is a dual agonist at both the GLP-1 receptor and the glucagon receptor.  Like 
GLP-1, glucagon also has an anorectic effect and suppresses food intake (3).  However, glucagon 
has additionally been shown to increase energy expenditure (EE) (4).  Therefore, it has been 
hypothesized that activation of both GLP-1 and glucagon receptors leading to a dual effect of 
reduced food intake along with enhanced energy expenditure could be expected to produce greater 
weight loss than simply decreasing food intake alone (as in the case with pure GLP-1 receptor 
agonist).  Studies conducted in obese mice treated with OXM versus a selective GLP-1-receptor 
agonist that did not exert any significant glucagon receptor activity support this hypothesis as 
OXM administration led to superior weight loss with similar glucose lowering activity compared 
to the GLP-1 receptor agonist group (5).  Additional work conducted in GLP-1 receptor knockout 
mice which received OXM and a glucagon receptor antagonist also yielded results that implicate 
activation of the glucagon receptor as a component to driving the weight loss observed with OXM 
(6).  Finally, OXM has also been suggested as a potential contributing factor in the metabolic 
improvements associated with bariatric surgery when it was observed that OXM concentrations 
rise markedly in response to oral glucose in morbidly obese women with T2DM who had 
undergone recent gastric bypass surgery (6). 
Although activation of the glucagon receptor increases blood glucose levels, simultaneous 
activation of the GLP-1 receptor could potentially counterbalance this (via a GLP-1 stimulated 
increase in insulin release with subsequent inhibition of gluconeogenesis) and prevent undesirable 
hyperglycemia.  This concept was supported by a rodent study which showed that OXM 
administration ameliorated glucose intolerance in mice fed a high-fat diet (7).  Other preclinical 
studies with synthetic dual agonists of the GLP-1 and glucagon receptors in rodent models have 
demonstrated similarly promising results in terms of weight loss as well as improvements in 
additional metabolic parameters, including antihyperglycemic effects (8, 9).  Likewise, a study of 
coinfusion of GLP-1 and glucagon in overweight/obese humans demonstrated an increase in EE 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 26 
and an amelioration of the hyperglycemia observed with infusion of glucagon alone (10).  Yet 
another study of coadministration of GLP-1 and glucagon conducted in overweight humans also 
resulted in an increase in EE and reduction in food intake and showed that the addition of GLP-1 
protected against glucagon-induced hyperglycemia (11). 
Oxyntomodulin administration has also been studied in humans and has been shown to produce 
effects on body weight reduction, suppression of food intake, and increase in EE (12, 13).  
Furthermore, OXM administered as a single dose to males with T2DM was shown to blunt 
glucose excursions during a continuous glucose infusion to an extent that was comparable to 
liraglutide administration in the same study (14).  Based on this finding, the authors hypothesize 
that OXM, a dual agonist of the GLP-1 and glucagon receptors, may exert glucoregulatory effects 
that are independent of weight loss.   Thus, the concept of dual activation of the GLP-1 and 
glucagon receptors merits further investigation as a potential means of promoting significant 
weight loss coupled with improvement in glucose control. 
SAR425899 is a dual agonist of the GLP-1 and glucagon receptors, and is being developed for the 
treatment of patients with T2DM who are overweight/obese.  Preclinical studies conducted in 
several animal models (rats, DIO mice, db/db mice, and monkeys) have demonstrated reductions 
in blood glucose and body weight as well as increase in EE (shown in mice) with SAR425899 
administration or its tool molecule surrogate.  Nonclinical pharmacology data and available 
preclinical toxicology results for SAR425899 are provided in the Investigator’s Brochure.  
Recently, the phase 1 study (TDR13700) conducted in both healthy volunteers and patients with 
T2DM was completed.  The effect of SAR425899 on glucose lowering and weight reduction was 
observed in the study.  There are no safety concerns from these completed studies to preclude the 
planning of the DRI study. 
Study DRI13940 is a 26-week randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, dose ranging 
Phase 2 study to assess the safety and efficacy of SAR425899 in overweight to obese patients 
with T2DM.  The study will consist of a 3-week screening period, a 26-week treatment period, 
and a 3-day follow-up period.  The primary objective of study DRI13940 is to assess the dose 
response relationship of SAR425899 versus placebo in terms of glycemic control as measured by 
change in glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c) from baseline to Week 26.  The main secondary 
objectives are to assess safety of SAR425899 as well as its effect on body weight.  The inclusion 
of an active comparator arm with liraglutide (Victoza®) is intended to help bestow further clinical 
perspective on the safety and efficacy of SAR425899 in this study. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 27 
5 
STUDY OBJECTIVES 
5.1 
PRIMARY 
The primary objective of this study is to assess the dose-response relationship of SAR425899 
versus placebo in terms of glycemic control as measured by the change in glycosylated 
hemoglobin (HbA1c) from baseline to Week 26. 
5.2 
SECONDARY 
Main secondary objectives: 
• 
To assess the effect of once daily dosing of SAR425899 on body weight over 26 weeks. 
• 
To assess the safety and immunogenicity profile of SAR425899 when administered as 
daily subcutaneous (SC) injections over 26 weeks, including assessment of the heart rate 
(HR) change from baseline to Week 26 by electrocardiogram (ECG) and Holter monitor. 
Additional secondary objectives: 
• 
To assess the proportion of patients achieving predefined HbA1c targets of <7% and 
<6.5% as well as the proportion of patients achieving ≥5% and ≥10% body weight loss at 
Week 26. 
• 
To assess the effect of once daily dosing of SAR425899 on additional parameters of 
glycemic control and lipid metabolism. 
• 
To assess the effect of once daily dosing of SAR425899 on additional pharmacodynamic 
(PD) biomarkers. 
• 
To assess the pharmacokinetic (PK) profile and parameters of SAR425899,  
inter-individual and inter-occasion variability in PK parameters using a population PK 
approach. 
5.3 
EXPLORATORY OBJECTIVE 
• 
To assess and compare the safety and efficacy of SAR425899 versus open-label liraglutide 
from baseline to Week 26.   
• 
To explore SAR425899 PK/PD relationships for glycemic parameters, body weight loss 
and heart rate. 
• 
To assess the treatment effects in each group on patient-reported outcomes. 
• 
To assess the treatment effects in each group on nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH) and 
cardiovascular biomarkers. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 28 
6 
STUDY DESIGN 
6.1 
DESCRIPTION OF THE STUDY 
This is a multicenter, multinational, randomized, placebo-controlled, 7-arm parallel-group 
Phase 2 study.  The study is double-blind with regard to SAR425899 and placebo treatments.  It is 
open-label with regard to liraglutide comparative treatment.  The volume of investigational 
medicinal product (IMP; ie, dose of SAR425899 or matching placebo) is not blinded. 
Patients will be randomized into 1 of the 7 treatment arms: 
• 
3 SAR425899 treatment arms receiving 3 dose levels (60 patients per arm). 
• 
3 corresponding SAR425899 placebo treatment arms receiving 3 dose levels (10 patients 
per arm, 30 patients total). 
• 
1 active comparator arm receiving 1.8 mg liraglutide (60 patients). 
For the biostatistical analyses, data from the 3 SAR425899 placebo arms will be pooled into 
1 placebo group. 
Patients will be stratified by screening visit HbA1c (<8 % versus ≥8 %) and Visit 4 (Day 1) body 
mass index (BMI: <35.0 kg/m2 versus ≥35.0 kg/m2). 
Treatment doses and dose increase process are described in Section 8.1. 
In case of fasting plasma glucose (FPG) or HbA1c (assessed by central laboratory) above 
predefined thresholds and if no reasons can be found for insufficient glucose control, it is 
recommended to add a rescue therapy (please see rescue therapy in Section 8.8.2).   
6.2 
DURATION OF STUDY PARTICIPATION 
6.2.1 Duration of study participation for each patient 
The study comprises 3 periods as described below (please see the graphical study design and 
study flowchart in Section 1.1 and Section 1.2, respectively): 
• 
A 3-week screening period,  
• 
A 26- week treatment period, 
• 
And a 3-day post treatment follow-up period. 
The total duration of the study will be approximately 30 weeks for each patient. 
A detailed description of the assessments performed in each study period is provided in 
Section 10.1. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 29 
6.2.2 Determination of end of clinical trial (all patients) 
The end of the study is defined as the last patient last visit planned per protocol, including the 
follow-up visit. 
6.3 
INTERIM ANALYSIS 
An interim analysis for body weight will be conducted when 108 patients (about 24 patients per 
dose arm of SAR425899 and liraglutide and 12 patients from the SAR425899 placebo arm) have 
been randomized and completed 14 weeks of treatment. Potentially an interim analysis for PK/PD 
will be conducted when 60% of patients have completed the end of treatment visit. For details, see 
Section 11.5.  
6.4 
STUDY COMMITTEES 
6.4.1 Pancreatic Safety Assessment Committee 
Potential safety signals for acute pancreatitis have been identified in the postmarketing experience 
of GLP-1 receptor agonists.  Specific monitoring for pancreatic events is planned in this study 
(see Section 10.6.4) and a Pancreatic Safety Assessment Committee (PSAC) has been set up.  
This is a committee of experts in the field of pancreatitis and pancreatic neoplasm, independent 
from the Sponsor and the Investigators, implemented to assess pancreatic events that may occur 
during the study.  The PSAC will review pancreatic events, including pancreatitis, pancreatic 
neoplasms and abnormal levels of amylase or lipase.  This review will be conducted in a blinded 
manner with regard to study treatment.  A detailed charter describes the PSAC procedures. 
6.4.2 Cardiovascular adjudication committee 
An independent Cardiovascular events Adjudication Committee (CAC) will be set up.  The CAC 
is a committee of experts in the field of cardiovascular or cerebrovascular diseases, independent 
from the Sponsor and the Investigators, implemented to adjudicate major cardiovascular events 
that may occur during the study.  The CAC reviews the cases in a blinded manner with regard to 
study treatment.  A detailed charter describes the CAC procedures. 
6.4.3 Data monitoring committee 
A Data Monitoring Committee (DMC) with members independent from the Sponsor and the 
Investigators is implemented in order to make appropriate recommendations on the conduct of the 
study for ensuring the protection and the safety of the enrolled patients.  The DMC will assess the 
adverse outcomes and if necessary, the risk/benefit ratio in DRI13940 through periodic review of 
the accumulated unblinded safety data.  A detailed charter outlines the activities of the DMC. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 30 
7 
SELECTION OF PATIENTS 
7.1 
INCLUSION CRITERIA 
I 01. Patients with T2DM, diagnosed at least 3 months before the screening visit, inadequately 
controlled on diet/exercise and/or metformin therapy (stable dose of at least 1.5 g/day or 
maximal tolerated dose) for at least 3 months prior to the screening visit. 
I 02. Signed written informed consent. 
7.2 
EXCLUSION CRITERIA 
Patients who have met all the above inclusion criteria listed in Section 7.1 will be screened for the 
following exclusion criteria which are sorted and numbered in the following 3 subsections:  
7.2.1 Exclusion criteria related to study methodology 
E 01. At screening, patient’s age < legal age of adulthood or >80 years. 
E 02. Screening HbA1c <7.0% or >10.0%. 
E 03. FPG >15 mmol/L (270 mg/dL) measured by the central laboratory at screening (Visit 1), 
and confirmed (>15 mmol/L [270 mg/dL]) by a repeat test before randomization.  
E 04. Type 1 diabetes mellitus. 
E 05. BMI <25 kg/m2 or >45 kg/m2. 
E 06. Treatment with glucose-lowering agent(s) other than metformin currently or within the 
3 months prior to screening. 
E 07. Previous insulin use, except for episode(s) of short-term treatment (≤15 consecutive days) 
for intercurrent illness or pregnancy or use of insulin within the last 6 months. 
E 08. History of acute metabolic complication, such as metabolic acidosis, including diabetic 
ketoacidosis, or hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state within 3 months prior to screening 
Visit 1. 
E 09. Hypoglycemic unawareness as judged by the Investigator. 
E 10. Untreated or uncontrolled hypothyroidism/hyperthyroidism. 
E 11. Use of systemic glucocorticoids for one week or more within the last 3 months, or 
anticipated need for systemic glucocorticoids during the study. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 31 
E 12. Current or history of treatment with medications within the 3 months prior to screening 
Visit 1, that may cause significant weight gain: including systemic glucocorticoids (except 
for <7 days), tricyclic antidepressants, atypical antipsychotic and mood stabilizers 
(eg, imipramine, amitryptiline, mirtazapine, paroxetine, phenelzine, chlorpromazine, 
thioridazine, clozapine, olanzapine, valproic acid and its derivatives, and lithium) and 
weight loss (including but not limited to:  orlistat, lorcaserin, pramlintide, metreleptin, 
topiramate and phentermine either alone or in combination, zonisamide and burproprion, 
either alone or in combination). 
E 13. Current participation in an organized diet reduction program or clinical trial of weight 
control (within the last 3 months prior to screening). 
E 14. History of prior surgical treatment for obesity or intent to pursue surgical treatment for 
obesity during the study period. 
E 15. Weight loss attempt, plans for major changes in physical activities or significant change in 
body weight in the 3 months prior to screening (Significant change in body weight is 
defined as ≥5 kg self-reported change during the previous 3 months). 
E 16. Any technical/administrative reason (eg, patient homeless) that makes it impossible to 
randomize the patient in the study.  
E 17. Patient who has previously participated in any clinical trial of SAR425899. 
E 18. Previous treatment with GLP-1 receptor agonists or GLP-1 analogs. 
E 19. Patients who are night shift workers. 
E 20. Current drug or alcohol abuse or known history of drug or alcohol abuse within 6 months 
prior screening Visit 1. 
E 21. Patient who has taken other investigational drugs or prohibited therapy for this study 
within 3 months or 5 half-lives from screening or randomization, whichever is longer 
E 22. Any clinically significant abnormality identified on physical examination, laboratory tests, 
ECG or vital signs at the time of screening that in the judgment of the Investigator or 
qualified Subinvestigator would make implementation of the protocol or interpretation of 
the study results difficult or would preclude the safe participation of the subject in this 
protocol (example: heart rate >100 bpm at screening). 
E 23. Laboratory findings at the time of screening (central laboratory): 
• 
Amylase and/or lipase >2 times the upper limit of the normal laboratory range (ULN). 
• 
Alanine aminotransferase (ALT) >3 ULN. 
• 
Total bilirubin >1.5 ULN (except in case of Gilbert’s syndrome). 
• 
Calcitonin ≥20 pg/mL (5.9 pmol/L). 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 32 
• 
Serum creatinine levels ≥1.5 mg/dL [males], ≥1.4 mg/dL [females], or estimated 
glomerular filtration rate (eGFR) <60 mL/min/1.73 m2, by modification of diet in renal 
disease (MDRD) measurement. 
• 
Fasting serum triglyceride >400 mg/dL. 
• 
Clinical criteria of severe anemia as per investigator judgment. 
• 
Neutrophils <1500/mm3 (or according to ethnic group) and/or platelets <100 000/mm3. 
• 
Positive test for Hepatitis B surface antigen and/or Hepatitis C antibody. 
E 24. Conditions/situations such as: 
• 
Patients with a short life expectancy. 
• 
Patients with conditions/concomitant diseases making them non-evaluable for the primary 
efficacy endpoint (eg, hemoglobinopathy or hemolytic anemia, receipt of blood or plasma 
products within 3 months prior to screening Visit 1, or plan to receive transfusion during 
the screening period).  
• 
Patients with conditions/concomitant diseases precluding their safe participation in this 
study (eg, active malignant tumor, sever or unstable major systemic diseases). 
• 
Unstable proliferative diabetic retinopathy or any other rapidly progressive diabetic 
retinopathy or macular edema likely to require treatment (eg, laser, surgical treatment or 
injectable drugs) during the study period. 
• 
Subjects with unstable heart condition, defined as any one of the following within 
6 months prior to screening: 
a) Current heart failure (class III or IV), 
b) A myocardial infarction, coronary artery bypass graft surgery, or angioplasty, 
c) Diagnosis of unstable angina requiring medication, 
d) Transient ischemic attack, cerebral infarct, or cerebral hemorrhage. 
• 
Planned coronary, carotid or peripheral artery revascularization procedures. 
• 
Poorly controlled hypertension (a resting systolic blood pressure [BP] >160 mm Hg and/or 
diastolic BP >95 mm Hg at screening). 
• 
History of long QT syndrome and/or QTc more than 450 ms at screening visit. 
• 
History of pancreatitis or pancreatectomy. 
• 
Clinically relevant evidence or history of gastrointestinal disease associated with 
prolonged nausea and vomiting, including, but not limited to: gastroparesis or uncontrolled 
(ie, associated with prolonged nausea and vomiting) gastroesophageal reflux or chronic 
diarrhea in the past 6 months. 
• 
History of gastric emptying abnormality, malabsorption syndrome, irritable bowel 
syndrome, or inflammatory bowel disease. 
• 
History of major depressive disorder or suicide attempt or other major psychiatric disorder 
(eg, schizophrenia, bipolar disorder, etc.).  
• 
Obesity induced by other endocrinologic disorders (eg, Cushing Syndrome/Disease). 
• 
History of glucagonoma, insulinoma or pheochromocytoma. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 33 
• 
Impossibility to meet specific protocol requirements (eg, scheduled visits, patients unable 
to fully understand patient’s study documents and complete them, patients unable to fully 
understand the nature, scope, and possible consequences of the study, etc.). 
• 
Patient is uncooperative or has a condition that could lead to non-compliance with study 
procedures (eg, patient unable or unwilling to do self-injection or blood glucose 
monitoring using the sponsor-provided blood glucometer at home, etc.). 
• 
Patient is the Investigator or any Sub-investigator, research assistant, pharmacist, study 
coordinator, other staff or relative thereof directly involved in the conduct of the protocol. 
• 
Patient not suitable for participation, whatever the reason, as judged by the Investigator, 
including medical, psychological, social or clinical conditions, or patients potentially at 
risk of noncompliance to the study procedures. 
7.2.2 Exclusion criteria related to the active comparator and/or background therapies  
E 25. All contraindications to the use of the open label comparator liraglutide or 
warning/precaution of use (when appropriate) as displayed in the respective National 
Product Labeling that was used for defining these exclusion criteria. 
E 26. Known hypersensitivity to liraglutide. 
E 27. All contraindications to the use of the protocol background therapy metformin or 
warning/precaution of use (when appropriate) as displayed in the respective National 
Product Labeling that was used for defining these exclusion criteria. 
E 28. Known hypersensitivity to metformin. 
7.2.3 Exclusion criteria related to the current knowledge of Sanofi compound 
E 29. Pregnant or lactating women. 
E 30. Women of childbearing potential (WOCBP) not protected by highly-effective method(s) of 
birth control as listed below and/or who are unwilling or unable to be tested for pregnancy 
(for more details see contraceptive guidance in Appendix A). 
E 31. Male participant with a female partner of childbearing potential not protected by highly-
effective method(s) of birth control as listed below for the duration of the study and up to 
3 months after last dosing (for more details see contraceptive guidance in Appendix A). 
Hormonal contraception may be susceptible to interaction with the study drug, which may reduce 
the efficacy of the contraception method. In this case TWO highly effective methods of 
contraception should be used during the treatment periods and for at least 33 days, [corresponding 
to time needed to eliminate study treatment plus 30 days for study treatments with genotoxic 
potential] after the last dose of study treatment. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 34 
• 
Highly Effective Contraceptive Methods  
- 
Combined (estrogen- and progestogen-containing) hormonal contraception associated 
with inhibition of ovulation (oral, intravaginal, transdermal). 
- 
Progestogen-only hormone contraception associated with inhibition of ovulation (oral, 
injectable). 
- 
Implantable progestogen-only hormone contraception associated with inhibition of 
ovulation 
- 
Intrauterine device (IUD) 
- 
Intrauterine hormone-releasing system (IUS) 
- 
Bilateral tubal occlusion 
- 
Vasectomized partner 
- 
Sexual abstinence 
E 32. Male participant who is unwilling to refrain from donating sperm for the duration of the 
study and up to 3 months after last dosing. 
E 33. Personal or immediate family history of medullary thyroid cancer (MTC) or genetic 
conditions that predispose to MTC (eg, multiple endocrine neoplasia syndromes). 
E 34. Known hypersensitivity to glucagon or contraindications to glucagon use. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 35 
8 
STUDY TREATMENTS 
8.1 
INVESTIGATIONAL MEDICINAL PRODUCTS 
Between the protocol-scheduled on-site visits, interim visits may be required for IMP dispensing.  
As an alternative to these visits, IMPs may be supplied from the site to the patient via a 
Sponsor-approved courier company which was allowed by local regulations and approved by the 
subject. 
8.1.1 SAR425899 or matching placebo (solution for injection) 
• 
Pharmaceutical form:  SAR425899 solution for injection or matching placebo are supplied 
as cartridges containing 3 mL solutions for injection containing: 
- 
For SAR425899: SAR425899 at a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL in sodium dihydrogen 
phosphate dihydrate, di-sodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate, sodium chloride, 
m-cresol, HCL/NaOH and water for injection, 
- 
For SAR425899 placebo: sodium dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate, disodium hydrogen 
phosphate dodecahydrate, sodium chloride, m-cresol, HCL/NaOH and water for 
injection. 
• 
Route and method of administration: SC injection using the pen-type injector (Tactipen®). 
• 
Dose of IMP per administration: 
- 
For SAR425899 and matching placebo, patients will be randomized to following dose 
regimen :  
- 
Low dose: 1 step weekly dose increase (if no significant tolerability issues 
[example, nausea and vomiting] are observed): 0.06 mg ie, 12U – 0.12 mg 
ie, 24U (0.12mg ie, 24U for 25 weeks). 
- 
Mid dose: 2 step weekly dose increase (if no significant tolerability issues 
[example, nausea and vomiting] are observed): 0.06 mg ie, 12U – 0.12 mg 
ie, 24U – 0.16 mg ie, 32U (0.16 mg ie, 32U for 24 weeks). 
- 
High dose: 3 step weekly dose increase (if no significant tolerability issues 
[example, nausea and vomiting] are observed): 0.06 mg ie, 12U – 0.12 mg 
ie, 24U – 0.16 mg ie, 32U – 0.20 mg ie, 40U (0.20 mg ie, 40U for 23 weeks). 
• 
Timing: doses of SAR425899 and placebo should be injected in the morning at the same 
time every day except on clinic visit days.  
• 
On clinic visit days, SAR425899 and placebo injection time should be after blood 
tests/ECG measurement time in the morning and be coordinated with the meal test/PK 
sampling time.  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 36 
If the target dose is not tolerated, the study treatment can be decreased. Another attempt 
for dose increase may take place within 4 weeks and before Week 8 of treatment. Then, 
if the patient cannot reach or tolerate the target dose, he/she remains at the lower dose. 
If he/she cannot tolerate the lower dose, end of treatment assessments are done. Then, the 
patient will be discontinued from IMP but continues in the study and is followed up 
according to the study procedures as specified in this protocol (except for the  
post-treatment follow-up), up to the scheduled date of study completion.  After Week 8, 
if the dose is no longer tolerated, final on-treatment visit assessments are done and the 
patient is discontinued from the IMP. 
Reasons and handling of patient temporary or permanent treatment discontinuation are provided 
in Section 10.3. 
8.1.2 Liraglutide 
• 
Pharmaceutical form: liraglutide is supplied as 1 prefilled pen of Victoza® containing 
18 mg liraglutide in a 3 ml solution for injection (6 mg/mL, 3 mL).  Victoza marketed in 
USA will be used for USA, Victoza marketed in Canada will be used for Canada, and 
Victoza marketed in Germany will be used for the rest of the world. 
• 
Route of administration: prefilled, multidose pen will be used to deliver SC doses of 
0.6 mg, 1.2 mg, or 1.8 mg. 
• 
Dose of IMP per administration: liraglutide 1.8 mg daily after dose increase (0.6 mg daily 
for 7 days followed by 1.2 mg daily for 7 days followed by 1.8 mg daily for 24 weeks). 
• 
Timing:  doses of liraglutide should be injected in the morning at the same time every day 
except on clinic visit days. 
• 
On clinic visit days, liraglutide injection time should be after blood tests/ECG 
measurement time in the morning and be coordinated with the meal test time. 
Reasons and handling of patient temporary or permanent treatment discontinuation are provided 
in Section 10.3. 
8.1.3 Injection device and training 
Tactipen injector (specifically labelled for the use of the study) with needles will be provided to 
each patient separately from the cartridges kits.  Cartridges will have to be assembled in the 
Tactipen by the patient.  Handling procedure, detailed storage instructions of the pen-type injector 
and SC injection technique will be provided in a specific manual.   
For both Tactipen and liraglutide pen, before starting the first dosing and repeat as often as 
required, the patients will be trained on site by the study staff to use the injector pens and to 
perform the SC injection (see the flow chart Section 1.2).  Pen-device or related issues 
(malfunctions) should be reported to the Sponsor by the means of a procedure on product 
technical complaint (PTC) forms, which will be described in a separate manual. 
Training on self-measured plasma glucose (SMPG) technique will be performed and repeated as 
needed throughout the study. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 37 
Liraglutide is a marketed product, it will be administrated as per local labelling (such as SmPC in 
the European Union or PI in the US), except for the time of injection in order to be consistent with 
the study request. The first administration will be done under clinical staff supervision and it will 
have to follow the PTC process.  
8.2 
NONINVESTIGATIONAL MEDICINAL PRODUCTS 
8.2.1 Background treatment 
Patients included in the study should either be following a diet and exercise therapy and/or be 
taking metformin for at least 3 months prior to screening. 
8.2.1.1 Metformin 
Background treatment with metformin is considered as a noninvestigational medicinal product 
(NIMP). 
Metformin should be administered orally according to the local product labeling.  Metformin 
should be used at a stable dose of at least 1500 mg/day or at the maximal tolerated dose for at 
least 3 months prior to screening (Visit 1). 
The doses of metformin (if applicable) should be continued and should remain stable throughout 
the study unless there is a specific safety issue related to this treatment. 
The background treatment is to be reported in the electronic case report form (eCRF). 
The cost of the background treatment (metformin), if not covered by health insurance, can be 
reimbursed where permitted by local regulations. 
8.2.1.2 Diet and exercise 
Lifestyle and diet therapy followed before the time of screening is to be continued during the 
study.  Counseling will be provided by a healthcare professional at screening Visit 3 or Visit 4, 
and Visit 10, and should be consistent with international or local guidelines for patients with 
T2DM (with regard to the distribution of calories among carbohydrates, proteins, and fats, 
exercise, etc.). 
8.3 
BLINDING PROCEDURES 
8.3.1 Methods of blinding 
For SAR425899, a double-blind design has been set up.  The cartridges, containing either 
SAR425899 or matching placebo solution for injection, are indistinguishable to preserve the 
double-blind.  The dose level is not blinded as the volume to be injected and the number of kits 
dispensed is different between the doses. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 38 
Each cartridges treatment kit for SAR425899 or placebo is labeled with a treatment kit number, 
which is generated by a computer program from the Sponsor.  In accordance with the 
double-blind design, Investigators will remain blinded to study treatment on SAR425899/placebo 
(dose level not blinded) and will not have access to the randomization (treatment codes) except 
under exceptional medical circumstances described in Section 8.3.2.  Consequently, the double 
blinded will be maintained on SAR425899/placebo (dose level not blinded).  
Liraglutide (Victoza®) kits are under open-label design. 
The Investigator and the Sponsor will not have access to the data of the primary efficacy endpoint 
(ie, HbA1c) nor to FPG, or the data of the meal test endpoints (postprandial plasma glucose 
[PPG], and blood glucose excursion, insulin, proinsulin, and C peptide and associated excursion 
values) obtained after baseline visit until V12 (Week 26), or until End of Treatment visit in case 
of premature treatment discontinuation. In case the central laboratory detects a FPG or HbA1c 
above the rescue threshold the investigator will receive an alert by the central laboratory. CAC 
members will review and adjudicate major cardiovascular events in a blinded manner (please refer 
to Section 6.4.2). PSAC members will review and adjudicate pancreatic events in a blinded 
manner (please refer to Section 6.4.1). The DMC will receive unblinded, closed reports from an 
independent statistical group for review (see Section 6.4.3). These reports will have to be handled 
strictly confidentially. None of these reports may be delivered to unauthorized persons. 
However, the study team may review the data for the primary efficacy parameter in descriptive 
statistics for the overall treatment during data review meetings. An independent programmer will 
generate the descriptive statistics for HbA1c, FPG and meal test related parameters. 
Refer to Section 10.5 for suspected unexpected serious adverse drug reaction unblinding by the 
Sponsor. 
8.3.2 Randomization code breaking during the study 
In case of an adverse event (AE), the code should only be broken in circumstances when 
knowledge of the IMP is required for treating the patient.  
Code breaking can be performed at any time by using the proper module of the Interactive 
Response Technology (IRT) and/or by calling any other phone number provided by the Sponsor 
for that purpose.  If the blind is broken, the Investigator should document the date, time of day, 
and reason for code breaking. 
If the code is broken, the patient must withdraw from IMP administration. 
8.4 
METHOD OF ASSIGNING PATIENTS TO TREATMENT GROUP 
The randomized treatment kit number list is generated centrally by Sanofi. 
The IMPs are packaged in accordance with this list. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 39 
The randomization and treatment allocation are performed centrally by an Interactive Response 
Technology (IRT): 
• 
The study biostatistician provides the randomization scheme and the IRT generates the 
patient randomization list (including stratification) according to which it allocates 
treatment groups to the patients and the corresponding treatment kits. 
• 
Patients will be randomized to 1 of the following treatment arms during the 26-weeks 
according to a randomization ratio of 6:6:6:1:1:1:6: 
- 
SAR425899 0.12 mg, 
- 
SAR425899 0.16 mg, 
- 
SAR425899 0.20 mg, 
- 
Placebo 0.12 mg, 
- 
Placebo 0.16 mg, 
- 
Placebo 0.20 mg, 
- 
Liraglutide 1.8 mg. 
The randomization is stratified by screening HbA1c value (<8.0% versus ≥8.0%) and Visit 4 
(Day 1) BMI (<35.0 kg/m2 versus ≥35.0 kg/m2).   
At screening visit, the Investigator or designee has to contact the IRT center to receive the Patient 
number.  The patient identification (Patient number) is composed of a 12-digit number containing 
the 3-digit country code, the 4-digit center code, and the 5-digit patient chronological number 
(which is 00001 for the first patient screened in a center, 00002 for the second patient screened in 
the same center, etc). 
On V4 (Day 1), assessment results are reviewed and baseline assessments are completed. After 
confirming that the patient is eligible for randomization, the IRT is called, the investigator or 
designee has to provide some information (such as patient number provided by the IRT at 
screening visit, date of birth/dummy date of birth, etc.). The first treatment kit(s) are then 
allocated by the IRT. Afterwards the IRT is called again each time a new treatment kit(s) 
allocation is necessary, ie, at V6 (Week 2), V8 (Week 4) and V9 (Week 8), V10 (Week 14), and 
V11 (Week 20). 
The IRT will allocate sufficient treatment kits numbers until the next on-site visit.  In some 
specific circumstances, eg, damaged kit, the Investigator can perform a “replacement call” to the 
IRT to obtain an additional treatment kit. 
A randomized patient is defined as a patient who is allocated a treatment kit number by the IRT , 
and recorded in the IRT database, regardless of whether the treatment kit was used or not.  
A patient cannot be randomized more than once in the study. In cases where original screen 
failure is due to reasons expected to change (except for HbA1c) at rescreening and based upon the 
Investigator’s clinical judgment, the patient can be rescreened one time for this study. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 40 
8.5 
PACKAGING AND LABELING 
Packaging is in accordance with the administration schedule.  The content of the labeling is in 
accordance with the local regulatory specifications and requirements. 
The appropriate number of kits will be dispensed to cover up to the next dispensing visit (please 
refer to Section 1.2). 
Table 1 - List of treatment kits 
Kit name 
Packaging details 
SAR425899 and placebo treatment kits 
1 double blind label kit contains 2 pre-filled cartridges 
0,5mg/mL or placebo labelled in randomized conditions  
Tactipen® kit 
1 open-label kit contains 1 empty Tactipen label  
Liraglutide/Victoza® kit 
1 open-label kit contains 2 pens prefilled with a solution of 
6 mg/mL liraglutide labelled in sequential conditions  
 
8.6 
STORAGE CONDITIONS AND SHELF LIFE 
Investigators or other authorized persons (eg, pharmacists) are responsible for storing the IMP in a 
secure and safe place in accordance with local regulations, labeling specifications, policies, and 
procedures. 
Control of IMP storage conditions, especially control of temperature (eg, refrigerated storage) and 
information on in-use stability and instructions for handling the Sanofi compound should be 
managed according to the rules provided by the Sponsor. 
The expiry date is mentioned on the IMP labels, and storage conditions are written on the IMP 
labels and in the instruction leaflet. 
8.6.1 SAR425899 0.5 mg/ml or placebo 
Prior to first use, the cartridges have to be stored between +2°C and +8°C (36°F to 46°F), 
protected from light, and must not be frozen.   
Once in use, the cartridges have to be stored below +30°C (86°F) (do not refrigerate).   
Once in use, the cartridge has to be replaced if not completely used within 31 days. 
8.6.2 Liraglutide (Victoza) 
Prior to first use, liraglutide should be stored in a refrigerator between 2°C to 8°C (36°F to 46°F). 
After first use, liraglutide pen can be kept in a controlled room (15°C to 30°C; 59°F to 86°F) or in 
a refrigerator (2°C to 8°C; 36°F to 46°F). 
Liraglutide should be protected from light, must not be frozen, and must not be used if it has been 
frozen.  The pen should be replaced if not completely used within 30 days. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 41 
8.7 
RESPONSIBILITIES 
The Investigator, the hospital pharmacist, or other personnel allowed to store and dispense the 
IMP will be responsible for ensuring that the IMP used in the clinical trial is securely maintained 
as specified by the Sponsor and in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements. 
All IMPs will be dispensed in accordance with the Investigator's prescription and it is the 
Investigator's responsibility to ensure that an accurate record of IMP issued and returned is 
maintained. 
Any quality issue noticed with the receipt or use of an IMP (deficiency in condition, appearance, 
pertaining documentation, labeling, expiration date, etc) should be promptly notified to the 
Sponsor. Some deficiencies may be recorded through a complaint procedure. 
A potential defect in the quality of IMP may be subject to initiation of a recall procedure by the 
Sponsor. In this case, the Investigator will be responsible for promptly addressing any request 
made by the Sponsor, in order to recall the IMP and eliminate potential hazards. 
Under no circumstances will the Investigator supply IMP to a third party (except for Direct To 
Patient (DTP) shipment, for which a courier company has been approved by the Sponsor), allow 
the IMP to be used other than as directed by this clinical trial protocol, or dispose of IMP in any 
other manner. 
8.7.1 Treatment accountability and compliance 
Measures taken to ensure and document treatment compliance and IMPs accountability include: 
• 
Proper recording of treatment kit number or packaging number as required on appropriate 
eCRF page for accounting purposes. 
• 
All medication treatment kits (whether empty or unused) are returned by the patient at 
each visit when a treatment dispensing is planned. 
• 
The Investigator or his/her delegate tracks treatment accountability/compliance comparing 
the treatment number recorded on the patient diary with the treatment number of returned 
treatment kits (whether empty or unused) and fills in the patient treatment log. 
• 
The monitor in charge of the study then checks the data entered on the IMPs 
administration page by comparing them with the IMPs that has been retrieved and the 
patient treatment log form. 
• 
For the NIMP not provided by the Sponsor, tracking and reconciliation will be 
documented in patient’s source documents and reported in appropriate eCRF pages. 
8.7.2 Return and/or destruction of treatments 
A detailed treatment log of the destroyed IMP and NIMP will be established with the Investigator 
(or the pharmacist) and countersigned by the Investigator and the monitoring team.  The 
Investigator will not destroy the used and unused IMP unless the Sponsor provides written 
authorization. 
For NIMP reimbursed by the Sponsor, tracking and reconciliation will be achieved by the 
Investigator (or the pharmacist, if appropriate) according to the system proposed by the Sponsor. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 42 
8.8 
CONCOMITANT MEDICATION 
A concomitant medication is any treatment received by the patient concomitantly to any IMP(s). 
8.8.1 Prohibited medications 
Use of the following medications will not be permitted during the study: 
• 
Weight control treatment, including any medication with a labelled reference to weight 
loss or weight gain.  
• 
Systemic glucocorticoid use for more than 7 days. 
• 
Any antidiabetic treatment other than IMP, authorized background antidiabetic therapy 
and rescue therapy, if necessary.   
• 
GLP-1 receptor agonists or dipeptidyl peptidase 4 (DPP4) inhibitors. 
• 
Drugs that affect gastrointestinal motility (eg, chronic use of anticholinergics, 
antispasmodics, 5HT3 antagonists, opiates). 
• 
Medications that may cause significant weight gain such as antipsychotic medications, 
tricyclic antidepressants, and mood stabilizers (eg, imipramine, amitryptiline, mirtazapine, 
paroxetine, phenelzine, chlorpromazine, thioridazine, clozapine, olanzapine, valproic acid 
and its derivatives, and lithium), and growth hormone. 
• 
Cannabis, even if prescribed for medical reasons. 
8.8.2 Rescue therapy 
In case of FPG or HbA1c above pre-defined thresholds and if no reasons can be found for 
insufficient glucose control, it is recommended to add rescue therapy. 
Central laboratory alerts on FPG and HbA1c are set up to ensure that glycemic parameters remain 
under predefined threshold values (see hereinafter).  
The threshold values are defined as follows, depending on study period: 
From baseline Visit 4 (Week 0) to Visit 9 (Week 8, including value at Visit 9): FPG >270 mg/dL 
(15.0 mmol/L). 
From Visit 9 (Week 8) to Visit 10 (Week 14): FPG > 240 mg/dL (13.3 mmol/L). 
From Visit 10 (Week 14) to Visit 12 (Week 26): FPG>200 mg/dL (11.1 mmol/L) or HbA1c>8%. 
In case of FPG / HbA1c above the threshold values, the investigator should ensure that no 
reasonable explanation exists for insufficient glucose control, and in particular that:  
• 
Plasma glucose was actually measured in fasting condition (ie, after at least 8 hrs fast). 
• 
Investigational product is given at planned dose. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 43 
• 
There is no intercurrent disease, which may jeopardize glycemic control (eg, infectious 
disease). 
• 
Compliance with treatment is appropriate. 
• 
Compliance with diet and lifestyle is appropriate. 
If any of the above can reasonably explain the insufficient glycemic control, the investigator 
should undertake appropriate action, ie, 
• 
Dose increase of investigational product according to protocol (if tolerance allows). 
• 
Set up adequate investigation and treatment of intercurrent disease (to be reported in 
AE/concomitant medication parts of the eCRF). 
• 
Stress on the absolute need to be compliant with treatment. 
• 
Organize a specific interview with a Registered Dietician or other qualified nutrition 
professional and stress on the absolute need to be compliant to diet and lifestyle 
recommendations, and check a FPG / HbA1c assessment at the next visit. 
If none from the above-mentioned reasons can be found, or if appropriate action fails to decrease 
FPG / HbA1c under the threshold values, rescue medication may be introduced. 
The choice of rescue therapy is at the investigator’s discretion with the exception of using GLP-1 
receptor agonists or DPP4 inhibitors. 
All assessments planned in Visit 12 are to be performed before initiating rescue therapy. After 
these assessments are completed and rescue therapy initiated, the patient will remain in the study 
and continue to administer the study treatment (including background therapy). The planned visits 
and assessments should be performed until the last scheduled visit. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 44 
9 
ASSESSMENT OF INVESTIGATIONAL MEDICINAL PRODUCT 
9.1 
PRIMARY ENDPOINT 
All biological efficacy and safety assessments will be performed by a central laboratory.  Detailed 
information on samples drawing, management, and analysis will be provided in a specific manual. 
9.1.1 Primary efficacy endpoint 
• 
Change in HbA1c from baseline to Week 26. 
9.1.1.1 Observation period of the primary efficacy endpoint 
All scheduled measurements collected during the study will be used in the analysis, including 
those obtained after IMP discontinuation or rescue medication use. 
The baseline value for efficacy endpoints is the last available value prior to the first injection of 
IMP or the last available value on or before the date of randomization if not treated with IMP. 
9.1.1.2 Assessment method 
For the eligibility and efficacy assessments of the study, HbA1c is measured by a certified level I 
National Glycohemoglobin Standardization Program (NGSP) central laboratory at time points 
according to the flow chart in Section 1.2. 
9.2 
SECONDARY ENDPOINTS 
9.2.1 Secondary efficacy endpoints 
• 
Change in body weight from baseline to Week 26. 
• 
Percentage of patients achieving predefined HbA1c targets of <7% and <6.5% at Week 26. 
• 
Percentage of patients achieving ≥5% and ≥10% body weight loss at Week 26. 
• 
Change in FPG from baseline to Week 26. 
• 
Change in 7-point SMPG profile from baseline to Week 26 (each time point and mean 
daily value). 
• 
Change in PPG in response to a standardized meal test in up to 50% subset of all patients 
from baseline to Week 26 at time points premeal, 10mn, 20mn, 0.5h, 1h, 1.5h, 2h, 3h, 4h 
post meal, and associated glucose excursion values at these time points. 
• 
Percentage of patients requiring rescue therapy during 26-week treatment period. 
• 
Change in fasting insulin, pro-insulin, and C-peptide from baseline to Week 26, change in 
postprandial insulin, proinsulin and C-peptide in response to a standardized meal test in up 
to 50% subset of all patients from baseline to Week 26 at time points premeal, 10mn, 
20mn, 0.5h, 1h, 1.5h, 2h, 3h, 4h post meal, and associated excursion values for each of the 
above parameters at these time points 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 45 
• 
Change in β-cell function assessed by HOMA-β from baseline to Week 26. 
• 
Change in insulin resistance assessed by HOMA-IR from baseline to Week 26. 
• 
Change in fasting lipid profile (total cholesterol, triglycerides, LDL-C, and HDL-C), free 
fatty acids, and ketone bodies from baseline to Week 26. 
• 
Changes in PD biomarkers assessments from baseline to Week 26 will be performed on 
the following variables: 
- 
Waist circumference, hip circumference, waist to hip ratio, 
- 
VAS for appetite/satiety score, 
- 
Fasting levels of adiponectin. 
9.2.1.1 Observation period of secondary efficacy endpoints 
All scheduled measurements collected during the study will be used in the analysis, including 
those obtained after IMP discontinuation or rescue medication use. 
The baseline value for the efficacy endpoints is the last available value prior to the first injection 
of IMP or the last available value on or before the date of randomization if not treated with IMP. 
9.2.1.2 Assessment methods 
9.2.1.2.1 Fasting plasma glucose 
Blood samples for FPG measurements will be assessed at the central laboratory for the time points 
referenced according to the flow chart in Section 1.2. 
9.2.1.2.2 Standardized meal test definition and change in postprandial glucose 
Patients will undergo a standardized meal challenge to assess PPG, insulin, proinsulin, C-peptide 
as well as excursion values for above parameters at Visit 3 (Week -1) and at the end of treatment 
(Visit 12, Week 26) (Table 2). 
A standardized meal will be served 2 hours after morning dose (at T2H) on Visit 12 (Week 26), 
and at the corresponding time on Visit 3 (Week -1).  The standardized meal for all patients should 
be consumed within a 10-minute period. 
The standardized meal contains approximately 600 kcal and is composed of 50 to 55% 
carbohydrates, 15 to 20% proteins, and 25 to 30% fat.  The composition and quantity of 
standardized meal must be identical throughout the study. 
The start of the standardized meal is defined as a reference timepoint for further blood sample 
collection.   
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 46 
Blood samples for determination of plasma glucose, and insulin, proinsulin, C-peptide, in 
response to meal test will be collected at (premeal, 10 min, 20min, 0.5h, 1h, 1.5h, 2h, 3h, 4h 
postmeal) on Weeks -1 and 26. The excursions values for plasma glucose, and insulin, proinsulin, 
C-peptide will be calculated by subtracting the premeal values from the values collected for each 
respected timepoints at 10min, 20min, 0.5h, 1h, 1.5h, 2h, 3h and 4h. The AUC values for the 
above meal test parameters may be calculated as necessary. 
Meal test ingestion time should be recorded in the eCRF. 
Meal test will be proposed to all the population, and will be limited to the first up to 50% of 
patient who agree. 
If the patient needs to receive a rescue antidiabetic medication, the standardized meal test should 
be performed before the introduction of the rescue medication and at the end of the study.  
In case of permanent discontinuation of the treatment with IMP, the standardized meal test should 
be performed only if the patient receives the IMP on the day of the visit. The meal test should also 
be performed at the end of study as planned. 
Table 2 - Sampling schedule for glucose, insulin, proinsulin and C peptide in response to a 
standardized meal test in up to 50% subset of all patients 
Blood sampling time (hh:mm) 
Blood sampling 
Morning study treatment injection  
00:00 
 
Pre meal  
 
X 
Standardized meal  
02:00 
 
2h10 after morning injection  
02:10 
X 
2h20 after morning injection  
02:20 
X 
2h 30 after morning injection  
02:30 
X 
3h00 after morning injection  
03:00 
X 
3h30 after morning injection  
03:30 
X 
4h00 after morning injection  
04:00 
X 
5h00 after morning injection  
05:00 
X 
6h00 after morning injection  
06:00 
X 
 
9.2.1.2.3 Self-monitored plasma glucose profiles 
The 7-point SMPG profile should be measured at the following 7 points: preprandial and 2 hours 
postprandial for breakfast, lunch, dinner and at bedtime.  Two hours postprandial (breakfast, lunch 
and dinner) is defined as 2 hours after the start of the meal. 
The patients are requested to perform 7-point SMPG profile measurement over a single 24-hour 
period in the week before Visit 4 (Week 0), Visit 10 (Week 14), and Visit 12 (Week 26, end of 
treatment assessment visit).  All SMPG values measured on these days will be recorded with a 
glucometer provided by the Sponsor. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 47 
9.2.1.2.4 Body weight 
Body weight should be obtained with the patient wearing undergarments or very light clothing 
and no shoes, and with an empty bladder in fasting conditions, in the morning before breakfast.  
The same scale should be used throughout the study, and calibrated on a regular basis as 
recommended by the manufacturer.  The use of balance scales is recommended; if digital scales 
are used, testing with standard weights is of particular importance.  The floor surface on which the 
scale rests must be hard and should not be carpeted or covered with other soft material.  The scale 
should be balanced with both weights at zero and the balance bar aligned.  The patient should 
stand in the center of the platform as standing off-center may affect measurement.  The weights 
are moved until the beam balances (the arrows are aligned).  The weight is read and recorded in 
the eCRF and source data.  Self-reported weights are not acceptable; patients must not read the 
scales themselves. 
Body weight will be measured on days indicated in the flow chart (see Section 1.2). Weight 
should be measured in the fasting state in the morning at approximately the same time with an 
empty bladder, without shoes and only wearing undergarments or light clothing.  Weight 
measured at screening Visit 1 will be used only for calculation of screening BMI for eligibility 
criteria whereas weight measured at Visit 4 will be used as baseline for assessment of change in 
body weight and for calculation of baseline BMI which will be the BMI value used for 
stratification. 
9.2.1.2.5 Blood glucose, insulin, and C-peptide 
Glucose, C-peptide, and insulin samples collected for the determination of the PD effects 
(including calculation of HOMA-β and HOMA-IR) will be analyzed by a central laboratory using 
standardized and validated methods on days indicated in the flow chart (see Section 1.2). 
9.2.1.2.6 Change in lipid panel 
Change in fasting lipid profile (total cholesterol, triglycerides, LDL-C, and HDL-C), free fatty 
acids will be analyzed by a central laboratory at screening (Week -3), baseline (Week 0), Visit 10 
(Week 14), and Visit 12 (Week 26). 
Fasting ketone bodies will be analyzed by a central laboratory at baseline (Week 0), Visit 8 
(Week 4), Visit 9 (Week 8), Visit 10 (Week 14), Visit 11 (Week 20), and Visit 12 (Week 26). 
9.2.1.2.7 Change in pharmacodynamics (PD) biomarkers  
Waist and hip measurement method 
Waist and hip circumference will be measured on days indicated in the flow chart (Section 1.2). 
Waist circumference should be measured at the midpoint between the lower margin of the least 
palpable rib and the top of the iliac crest, using a stretch-resistant tape that provides a constant 
100 g tension.  Hip circumference should be measured around the widest portion of the buttocks, 
with the tape parallel to the floor. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 48 
For both measurements, the subject should stand with feet close together, arms at the side and 
body weight evenly distributed, and should wear little clothing.  The subject should be relaxed, 
and the measurements should be taken at the end of a normal expiration.  Each measurement 
should be repeated twice; if the measurements are within 1 cm of one another, the average should 
be calculated.  If the difference between the two measurements exceeds 1 cm, the 2 measurements 
should be repeated, final measurement will be recorded in the eCRF. 
Visual analog scale (VAS) for appetite /satiety score 
To be conducted in conjunction with the meal test, completed by the patients twice: before the 
meal and 4 hours post meal. 
The VAS consists of 100-mm lines with words anchored at each end, describing Hunger, Satiety, 
Fullness, Prospective food consumption , Desire to eat something fatty, Desire to eat something 
salty, Desire to eat something sweet, Desire to eat something savory. 
Patients will be asked to make a vertical mark across the line corresponding to their feelings. 
Quantification will be performed by measuring the distance from the left end of the line to the 
mark. 
Fasting levels of adiponectin 
Fasting levels of adiponectin will be analyzed at central laboratory using standardized and 
validated methods at baseline Visit 4 (Week 0), Visit 10 (Week 14) and Visit 12 (Week 26). 
9.2.2 Safety endpoints 
The following safety parameters will be analyzed: 
• 
AEs, serious adverse events (SAEs) and adverse events of special interests (AESIs). 
• 
Hypoglycemia (severe, documented, asymptomatic, probable, relative). 
• 
Safety laboratory values. 
• 
Vital signs and physical examination. 
• 
Electrocardiogram (ECG) changes. 
• 
Change of heart rate from baseline to Week 26 by ECG.  
• 
Change of heart rate from baseline to Week 26 by Holter monitor in up to 50% subset of 
all patients. 
• 
Immunogenicity (anti-SAR425899 antibodies). 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 49 
9.2.2.1 Observation period of safety endpoints 
The observation period of safety data will be divided into 3 segments: 
• 
The pretreatment period is defined as the time between the date of the informed consent 
and the first injection of IMP. 
• 
The on-treatment period is defined as the time from the first injection of IMP up to 3 days 
(1 day for hypoglycemia) after the last injection of IMP, regardless of the introduction of 
rescue therapy.  The 3-day interval is chosen based on the half-life of the IMP 
(approximately 5 times the half-life of SAR425899). 
• 
The post treatment period is defined as the time starting 4 days after last injection of IMP 
(after the on-treatment period). 
The baseline value for safety endpoints will be the last available value prior to the first injection 
of IMP. 
9.2.2.2 Adverse events 
All AEs/SAEs will be coded to a “Lower Level Term (LLT)”, “Preferred Term (PT)”, “High 
Level Term (HLT)”, “High-Level Group Term (HLGT)” and associated primary “System Organ 
Class (SOC)” using the version of Medical Dictionary for Regulatory Activities (MedDRA) 
currently in effect at the sponsor at the time of database lock. MedDRA terms for hypersensitivity 
and injection site reactions will be included.  The occurrence of AE/SAEs is recorded from the 
time of signed informed consent until the end of the study. 
Refer to Section 10.4 to Section 10.7 for details. 
9.2.2.3 Hypoglycemia 
Hypoglycemia will be classified in categories according to the ADA Workgroup on hypoglycemia 
(severe, documented, asymptomatic, probable and relative) and assessed (15).  
Please refer to Section 10.6 for additional details. 
9.2.2.4 Laboratory safety variables 
The clinical laboratory data consist of blood analysis (including hematology, clinical chemistry, 
and urinalysis).  Clinical laboratory values will be analyzed after conversion into standard 
international units.  International units will be used in all listings and tables. 
The following laboratory safety variables will be analyzed: 
• 
Hematology: blood count (erythrocytes, hemoglobin, hematocrit, leukocytes), differential 
blood count (neutrophils, lymphocytes, monocytes, eosinophils, basophils) and platelets. 
• 
Clinical chemistry: total bilirubin (and, in case of values above the normal range, 
differentiation in conjugated and nonconjugated bilirubin), aspartate aminotransferase 
(AST), alanine aminotransferase (ALT), alkaline phosphatase (ALP), gamma-glutamyl 
transpeptidase (GGT), creatinine, Cystatin C, uric acid, sodium, potassium, calcium, 
phosphorus. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 50 
• 
Thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH), Total Triiodothyronine (T3) and Free Thyroxine 
(FT4). 
• 
Serum amylase and lipase. 
• 
Serum calcitonin. 
• 
Urine albumin/creatinine ratio assessment (to be done on first morning urine sample). 
In addition, the following laboratory data will also be collected at screening visit, baseline visit, 
and at on-site visits depending on the item (see the study flow chart in Section 1.2): 
• 
Serology tests: hepatitis B antigen, hepatitis C antibodies. 
• 
Serum pregnancy test in females of childbearing potential (serum pregnancy test should be 
done at screening and Week 26; serum or urine pregnancy test may be used at other 
timepoints. A positive urine pregnancy test should be confirmed with a serum test). 
• 
Serum follicle stimulating hormone (FSH) and estradiol (only in females requiring 
confirmation of postmenopausal status, and only at screening). 
Collection of 24h urine sample: On the day before the visit, patient urinates into the toilet when 
he/she gets up in the morning. Afterwards, all urine should be collected in the special container 
for the next 24 hours. On the day of the visit, the patient urinates into the container when he/she 
gets up in the morning. The patient should cap the container and keep it in the refrigerator or a 
cool place during the collection period. 
9.2.2.5 Vital signs and physical examination 
Clinical safety will be assessed by: 
• 
Physical examination  
• 
Vital signs (systolic and diastolic blood pressure, heart rate). 
- 
Blood pressure (mmHg) should be measured in sitting position, 
- 
Heart rate (bpm) will be measured in supine position at the time of the measurement of 
blood pressure (predose on Weeks -3, -1, 0, 2, 4, 8, 14, 20 and 26), 
- 
Height without shoes only at screening. 
9.2.2.6 Electrocardiogram variables 
9.2.2.6.1 Twelve-lead electrocardiogram 
Electrocardiogram data will be assessed by the Investigator based on the automatic device reading 
in the morning before the IMP intake. 
Standard 12-lead ECGs are recorded after at least 10 minutes in supine position (10-second 
recording at 25 mm/s, 10 mm/mV) at Week -3, 0, 4, 14, and 26.  The electrodes will be positioned 
at the same place for each ECG recording throughout the study. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 51 
Each ECG will consist of a 10-second recording of the 12 leads simultaneously, leading to: 
A single 12-lead ECG (25 mm/s, 10 mm/mV) printout with heart rate, PR, QRS, QT, QTc 
automatic correction evaluation (by the ECG device), including date, time, initials, and number of 
the subject, signature of the research physician. 
The Investigator’s medical opinion and automatic values will be recorded in the eCRF. This 
printout and/or digital storage will be retained at the site. 
Please also refer to Section 10.3 and the “General Guidelines for reporting AEs” in Section 
10.4.3. 
9.2.2.6.2 Holter monitoring 
Holter ECG will be collected over approximately 24 hours, starting on Visit 3 (Week -1), on 
Visit 10 (Week 14), and on Visit 12 (Week 26).  The electrodes will be positioned at the same 
place for each Holter recording throughout the study (attachment sites of the leads will be marked 
with an indelible pen).   
The Holter monitor will be proposed to all the population, and will be limited to the first up to 
50% of patient who agree.  Twenty–four hour average and night time average heart rate will be 
derived based on the holter monitoring. Twenty-four hour interval is defined to be from the time 
of dosing until 24 hours post dose.  Night time is defined to be the interval from 12 hours post 
dose until 24 hours post dose. For Visit 3, time of dosing is expected time of dosing on Day 1. 
Storage and shipment 
Holter recordings will be sent to an ECG reading center for further analysis. 
If the Holter memory cards will be downloaded to CDs/DVDs at the investigational site and the 
CDs/DVDs are then shipped to the reading center, the investigational site will keep a copy of the 
CDs/DVDs and will not erase the memory cards until being notified by the reading center to do so 
(when Holter recordings will be correctly downloaded into the reading center system).  Paper 
copies of all notifications will be kept as source documents on the investigational site. 
The digital recording, data storage, and transmission need to comply with all applicable regulatory 
requirements (eg, FDA 21 CFR Part 11). 
9.2.2.7 Anti-SAR425899 antibody assessment 
Anti-SAR425899 antibody samples will be collected in all patients (not for patients in the 
liraglutide arm) at baseline, Week 2, Week 4, Week 14, and Week 26 before dosing.  Patients will 
be asked to provide sample for anti-SAR425899 antibodies assessments 3 months after the end of 
the study if needed. As immunogenicity might contribute to patient safety, it is important for an 
ADA-assay intended to be used for clinical trials to achieve the highest sensitivity. Therefore,  
a 3-tiered approach will be employed to evaluate immunogenicity of SAR425899 in a clinical 
setting. In the first tier, all samples will be screened in order to distinguish putative positive 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 52 
samples from negative samples. Identified putative positive samples will be re-tested in the 
confirmatory assay in tier 2 where specific ADAs are identified.  All confirmed anti-SAR425899 
positive samples from tier 2 will be further characterized in tier 3. These samples will be titrated 
and ADAs cross-reacting with endogenous human Glucagon and GLP1 will be identified. In order 
to assess the neutralizing capacity of confirmed anti-SAR425899 positive ADA samples, 
dedicated anti-SAR425899 neutralizing assays will be employed. 
9.3 
OTHER ENDPOINTS 
9.3.1 Pharmacokinetics 
9.3.1.1 Sampling time 
Blood samples for determination of SAR425899 concentration in plasma will be collected at 
predose, 2h, 4h, 6h, 8h, 12h and 24h postdose on 2 different occasions, ie, Week 14, Week 26, in 
40 patients in total under SAR425899 or placebo (Table 3).  In addition to this full PK sampling 
scheduled, sparse PK sampling will be done in the remaining subset of patients in each 
SAR425899/placebo cohort conducted also at Weeks 14 and 26 (Table 4).  Sparse sampling 
schedule is predose and 6h postdose.   
The patients involved in the full PK analyses may also participate to the meal test substudy as 
well as the Holter monitor substudy. This subanalysis will be proposed to a population of specific 
sites, and will be limited to the first 40 patients who agree.  
If the patient needs to receive a rescue antidiabetic medication, The PK samples should be 
collected before the introduction of the rescue medication and at the end of the study. 
In case of permanent discontinuation of the treatment with IMP, the PK samples should be 
collected only if the patient receives the IMP on the day of the visit. Note that otherwise predose 
PK sample can be taken if the patient receives the IMP the day before. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 53 
Table 3 - Sampling schedule for Full PK in 40 patients in total under SAR425899 or placebo 
Blood sampling time (hh:mm) 
Blood sampling 
breakfasta 
 
 
Pre dose    
 
X 
Morning study treatment injection  
00:00 
 
 2h 00 after morning injection  
02:00 
X 
 4h00 after morning injection  
04:00 
X 
6h00 after morning injection  
06:00 
X 
8h00 after morning injection  
08:00 
X 
12h00 after morning injection 
12:00 
X 
24h00 after morning injection  
24:00 
X 
a Breakfast will not be taken for patients who will perform the meal test on the same day of the PK assessment. 
Table 4 - Sampling schedule for Sparse PK in patients under SAR425899 or placebo not involved in 
the Full PK sampling 
Blood sampling time (hh:mm) 
Blood sampling 
breakfasta 
 
 
Pre dose    
 
X 
Morning study treatment injection  
00:00 
 
 6h00 after morning injection  
06:00 
X 
a Breakfast will not be taken for patients who will perform the meal test on the same day of the PK assessment. 
9.3.1.2 Pharmacokinetics handling procedure 
Table 5 - Pharmacokinetics handling for SAR425899 
Sample type 
SAR425899 
Matrix 
plasma 
Blood sample volume 
2 mL 
Anticoagulant 
K2 EDTA 
Blood handling procedures 
Described in Laboratory manual 
Storage conditions 
-20°C 
 
9.3.1.3 Bioanalytical method 
Plasma samples will be analyzed for determination of SAR425899 concentration using a liquid 
chromatography with tandem mass spectrometry (LC-MS/MS) method with a lower limit of 
quantification (LLOQ) of 1.0 ng/mL. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 54 
9.3.1.4 Pharmacokinetics parameters 
Due to sparse sampling approach, PK analysis will be done using population PK modeling 
approach in order to estimate population PK parameters (CL/F, Vz/F, t1/2) and their variability. 
9.3.2 Pharmacogenetic assessment 
No pharmacogenetic assessments will be performed. 
9.3.3 Exploratory variables 
9.3.3.1 Change in NASH and cardiovascular biomarkers 
• 
Change in NASH biomarkers from baseline to Week 26: α2-macroglobulin, apolipoprotein 
A1, haptoglobin, CK18, GGT, ALT and AST. 
α2-macroglobulin, apolipoprotein A1, haptoglobin, GGT, ALT and AST will be analyzed 
from blood samples by a centralized laboratory using standardized and validated method. 
CK18 will be analyzed using validated method. 
• 
Change in Cardiovascular biomarkers from baseline to Week 26: high-sensitivity  
C-reactive protein (hs-CRP), brain natriuretic peptide (BNP). 
9.3.3.2 Exploratory pharmacokinetic/pharmacodynamic analysis 
Exploratory PK/PD analysis will be performed using glycemic parameters (HbA1c, FPG, PPG) 
excursion in response to a standardized meal test, body weight loss, and heart rate. 
9.3.4 Quality of life/health economic variables/other endpoints  
The patient-reported outcome (PRO) questionnaires in this study are the Weight-Related 
Symptoms Measure (WRSM), the Ability to Perform Physical Activities of Daily Living 
(APPADL, initially called the Impact of Weight on Activities of Daily Living) and the Impact of 
Weight on self-perception (IW-SP).  The questionnaires are attached in the Appendices (16). 
The 3 PRO questionnaires will be administered at baseline and Week 26.  The patients will be 
requested to complete the questionnaires by themselves during selected clinical visits in specific 
booklets, independently from investigator, site staff and any help from friends or relatives.  For 
validity purposes, patients will be asked to answer all the questions of the questionnaires at the 
start of the visit in a quiet place, before any procedures/tests and before discussing with the 
investigator, and while on site to return the completed questionnaires to the investigator or his/her 
designee on the same day. 
In case of early IMP discontinuation, the questionnaires will be administered at the visit planned 
for the last dosing day with IMP and afterwards as normally planned. 
The WRSM is a validated PRO questionnaire to measure the presence and bothersomeness of 
obesity symptoms (16).  It was developed with and for obese and overweight adults.  It includes 
20 items on shortness of breath, tiredness, sleep problems, sensitivity to cold, increased thirst, 
increased irritability, back pain, frequent urination, pain in the joints, water retention, foot 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 55 
problems, sensitivity to heat, snoring, increased appetite, leakage of urine, lightheadedness, 
increased sweating, loss of sexual desire, decreased physical stamina, and skin irritation.  The 
presence of each symptom is first asked to patient (Yes/No) and then the bothersomeness of 
symptom is evaluated on a 7-point Likert scale (from 0 [not at all] to 6 [a very great deal 
bothersomeness]).  A total score is calculated by summing the bothersomeness for each symptom, 
ranging from 0 to 120, with lower scores corresponding to less bothersomeness.  The completion 
time of the WRSM is less than 5 minutes.  It demonstrated robust psychometric properties in 
obese and overweight people including its responsiveness to weight decrease. 
The APPADL, previously named the Impact of Weight on Activities of Daily Living (IW-ADL) 
is a validated PRO questionnaire to measure the ability of moderately obese individuals with 
T2DM to perform daily physical activities (17).  It was developed with T2DM individuals with 
BMI between 25 and 40 kg/m².  It includes 7 items on flexibility, mobility, and activity level, 
evaluated on a 5-point Likert scale (from 1 [unable to do] to 5 [not at all difficult]).  A total score 
is calculated by summing the 7 items and dividing by the number of items, it ranges from 1 to 5, 
with higher scores corresponding to greater ability to do physical daily activities.  The completion 
time of the APPADL is estimated to be less than 5 minutes.  It demonstrated robust psychometric 
properties in patients with T2DM and BMI >30 kg/m² and was able to discriminate patients who 
achieved at least 5% weight loss from others who did not (18). 
The IW-SP is a validated questionnaire to assess an individual’s self-perception related to his or 
her weight.  It was developed with moderately obese individuals with T2DM (BMI 25 to 
40 kg/m²) (19).  It includes 3 items on unhappiness with appearance, self-consciousness in social 
situations, and overall self-perception, evaluated on a 5-point Likert scale (from 1 [always] to 5 
[never]).  A total score is calculated by summing the 3 items and dividing by the number of items, 
it ranges from 1 to 5, with higher scores corresponding to better self-perception.  The completion 
time of the IW-SP is estimated to be less than 2 minutes.  It demonstrated robust psychometric 
properties in patients with T2DM and BMI >30 kg/m² and was able to discriminate patients who 
achieved at least 5% weight loss from others who did not. 
In addition of the 3 PRO questionnaires, patients will be asked to answer questions at the end of 
the treatment period (Week 26).  This patient qualitative assessment of treatment aims to better 
understand patients’ views on benefits and disadvantages of the treatment they experienced during 
the trial.  The two first questions will ask patients to describe in free text the benefits and 
disadvantages of the drug they experienced during the trial.  A third question will ask patients if 
they would be willing to pursue the treatment they had during the trial (yes/no) and to describe the 
reasons in free text.  Finally, patients will be asked to give their perception of the drug benefit-risk 
on 7-point Likert scale ranging from -3 (disadvantages significantly outweigh the benefits) to 3 
(Benefits significantly outweigh the disadvantages) and where 0 corresponds to ‘Equal benefits 
and disadvantages’.  This patient qualitative assessment should take between 10 and 20 minutes.  
Patients’ answers to the 3 first questions will be analyzed qualitatively. Due to the availability of 
this questionnaire only in English, it will be limited to English speakers in United States and 
Canada only. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 56 
9.4 
FUTURE USE OF SAMPLES 
Samples for PK will be stored until final clinical study report is issued. Thereafter they will be 
discarded. Samples for immunogenicity will be stored for longer time period if necessary 
dependent on whether issues related to immunogenicity occurs in the study. The timeframe will 
be defined after the availability of immunogenicity results. 
9.5 
APPROPRIATENESS OF MEASUREMENTS 
SAR425899 is a dual agonist of the GLP-1 and glucagon receptors, and is being developed for the 
treatment of patients with T2DM who are overweight/obese.  Preclinical studies have 
demonstrated reductions in blood glucose and body weight as well as increase in energy 
expenditure with SAR425899 administration. 
The primary objective of this study is the change in HbA1c from baseline to Week 26. 
Several studies have documented a reduced risk for the development and progression of 
complications of type 2 diabetes, when HbA1c values are lowered. HbA1c is the benchmark for 
the overall glycemic control and is strongly correlated with FPG and PPG levels. Therefore, 
diabetes management strategies recommend strict glycemic control with an HbA1c <7% 
according to the American Diabetes Association (ADA) and European Association for the Study 
of Diabetes (EASD), and a more stringent goal of <6.5% for appropriate patients. The duration of 
study treatment is considered to be sufficient for achieving stable conditions with IMP and for 
enabling an adequate assessment of time-dependent changes in HbA1c. 
The problem of weight gain in type 2 diabetes is widely recognized. More than 80% of 
individuals with type 2 diabetes are overweight, many at the time of diagnosis. Consequently, 
iatrogenic weight gain is not only unwelcome, but represents an important clinical issue that can 
become a barrier to the successful management of glycemic control. Recently, the phase 1 study 
(TDR13700) conducted in both healthy volunteers and patients with T2DM was completed.  The 
effect of SAR425899 on glucose lowering and weight reduction was observed in the study. 
A number of biomarkers will be integrated into the trial, as these markers may serve to better 
understand the mechanism of action (MoA) of dual agonism and confirm that target receptors 
were hit. For glucagon effects on lipid metabolism and lipolysis have been described. 
Increased heart rate has been linked to cardiovascular diseases. BNP and hs-CRP are added as 
biomarkers to evaluate the risk of cardiovascular diseases (20). 
The therapeutic potential of GLP-1 analog in the treatment of NASH has been suggested recently. 
The change of NASH biomarkers will be evaluated in the study (21). 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 57 
10 
STUDY PROCEDURES 
10.1 
VISIT SCHEDULE 
The visit schedule and procedures/assessments listed in the study flow chart in Section 1.2 are not 
repeated in this section. 
The aim of this section is to provide details on how some of the procedures/assessments have to 
be performed. 
The study consists of 10 on-site visits and 3 phone-call visits. 
The patient has to be fasting for all on-site visits.  For all these visits, the patient should be seen in 
the morning, at approximately the same time, as far as possible. 
The fasting condition is defined as an overnight fast no less than 8 hours that consisted of no food 
or liquid intake, other than water.  The IMP and other glucose-lowering agents (ie, metformin) 
should be administered after the fasting blood sample is drawn for all laboratory tests on the study 
site. 
Note: If the patient is not fasting at the visits specified above, the blood sample will not be 
collected and a new appointment should be given to the patient for the following day if possible, 
with instruction to be fasted. 
Visit window: during the screening period and for randomization visit a visit window of ±3 days 
is acceptable. During the treatment period a visit window of ±3 days is acceptable between Visit 4 
(Week 0) and Visit 9 (Week 8), and a visit window of ±5days is acceptable from Visit 10 
(Week 14) to Visit 12 (Week 26). A visit window of -1 days or +3 days for the post-treatment 
follow up visit (V13) is acceptable using the day of V12 as reference. If one visit date is changed, 
the next visit should occur according to the original schedule. 
10.1.1 Screening Period (Week -3 to Week 0) 
The duration of the screening period is 3 weeks from Visit 1 (Week -3) to Visit 4 (Week 0) which 
has a window of 21 ±3 days. 
Patients will be screened at Visit 1 after signature of the informed consent form.  All laboratory 
tests measured at central laboratory needed for checking the exclusion criteria of the patients will 
be performed during the screening period.  Patients who meet the inclusion criteria and who have 
no exclusion criteria, as noted in Section 7.1 and Section 7.2, will be randomized at Visit 4 
(Week 0).  The IRT will be contacted at Visit 1 for notification of screening and for patient 
number allocation. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 58 
10.1.1.1 On-site Visit 1 (Week -3, screening visit) 
For the complete list and contents of procedures/assessments scheduled for the screening period, 
please refer to the “Study Flow Chart” in Section 1.2 and for detailed description of assessments 
Section 9 and Section 10.6. 
The following procedures/assessments will be performed at Visit 1 (Week -3): 
• 
Obtaining the informed consent: 
- 
The patient will receive verbal information concerning the aims and methods of the 
study, its constraints and risks and the study duration.  Written information will be 
provided to the patient.  Written informed consent must be signed by the patient and 
investigator prior to any investigations.  For patients included in PK, Holter monitor or 
meal test substudy, a specific inform consent must be signed by the patients and 
investigator prior to any investigations, 
- 
IRT will be notified (allocation of patient number, registration of screening, collection 
of demographic information).  The patient number is composed of a 12-digit number 
containing the 3-digit country code, the 4-digit center code and the 5-digit patient 
chronological number (which is 00001 for the first patient screened in a center, 00002 
for the second patient screened in the same center, etc). 
• 
Assessment of inclusion/exclusion criteria. 
• 
Collection of demographic data (age, gender, race and ethnic origin). 
• 
Patient’s medical (including detailed cardiovascular) and surgical history. 
• 
History of T2DM treatment including documentation of treatment regimen, and 
microvascular complications (eye, kidney) and their treatments. 
• 
Concomitant medication history. 
• 
Habits: alcohol habits (during the last 12 months), smoking status. 
• 
Prior medication history, particularly as it relates to diabetes and weight loss medications. 
• 
Physical examination including vital signs (systolic blood pressure [SBP] and diastolic 
blood pressure [DBP] in sitting position, heart rate in supine position).   
• 
Height without shoes. 
• 
Body weight measurement. 
Injection training and training on performing SMPG measurement (see Section 8.1.3): Patients 
randomized will be instructed by the staff how to properly use the injector pen as well as how to 
store it. Instructions on self-injection technique are also given. 
• 
Laboratory assessments performed by the central laboratory: 
- 
HbA1c, 
- 
FPG. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 59 
Safety laboratory assessments for hematology and chemistry (please refer to Section 9.2.2.4): 
- 
Lipid panel, 
- 
Amylase/lipase, 
- 
Calcitonin, 
- 
Urinalysis, 
- 
Hepatitis serology (HBsAg, HCAb), 
- 
Serum pregnancy test (β-HCG) in women of childbearing potential, only, 
- 
Estradiol and FSH test for postmenopausal women only, 
• 
12-lead ECG. 
• 
Provide patient with a urine container and instruct them how to collect at home in the 
morning of their first urine and to bring the urine sample to the site at planned visit for the 
urine /creatinine ratio assessment. 
10.1.1.2 On site Visit 2 (Week -2, screening visit) 
• 
Assessment exclusion criteria. 
Injection training and training on performing SMPG measurement (see Section 8.1.3): Patients 
randomized will be instructed by the staff how to properly use the injector pen as well as how to 
store it. Instructions on self-injection technique are also given. 
• 
Recording of AEs. 
• 
Recording of hypoglycemic events (if any). 
10.1.1.3 On site Visit 3 (Week -1, screening visit) 
• 
Assessment exclusion criteria. 
• 
Vital signs (SBP and DBP in sitting position and heart rate in supine position). 
• 
Diary and glucometer dispense. 
• 
Injection training and training on performing SMPG measurement (see Section 8.1.3): 
Patients randomized will be instructed by the staff how to properly use the injector pen as 
well as how to store it. Instructions on self-injection technique are also given. 
• 
Diet and lifestyle counseling please see Section 8.2.1.2. 
• 
Concomitant medication. 
• 
Holter monitor if applicable (subset of patients).  
• 
Standardized meal test with VAS for appetite/satiety if applicable (subset of patient) 
(see Section 9.2.1.2.2 and Section 9.2.1.2.7). 
• 
Urine albumin/creatinine ratio assessment (to be done on first morning urine sample). 
• 
Recording of AEs. 
• 
Recording of hypoglycemic events (if any). 
• 
Provide patient with a urine container and additional appropriate materials and instruct 
them how to collect at home his/her urine for the 24 hours prior to Visit 4 and to bring the 
urine sample to the site at visit 4 for the urinary free-cortisol and creatinine measurement. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 60 
For safety and practical reasons, approximately 45 minutes before start of blood sampling on days 
with meal test an indwelling catheter may be inserted in a peripheral vein of the forearm in order 
to obtain blood samples. Between samplings, the catheter will be locked with a mandrel. 
10.1.2 Twenty-six-week double-blind treatment period 
Primary efficacy assessment takes place at the end of this randomized, double-blind,  
placebo-controlled main treatment period. This period lasts from baseline (Visit 4, Week 0) to end 
of main double-blind period (Visit 12, Week 26). 
For SAR425899 and matching placebo, patients will be randomized to following dose regimen:  
• 
Low dose: 1 step weekly dose increase (if no significant tolerability issues [example, 
nausea and vomiting] are observed).  
0.06 mg ie, 12U – 0.12 mg ie, 24U (0.12mg ie, 24U for 25 weeks). 
• 
Mid dose: 2 step weekly dose increase (if no significant tolerability issues [example, 
nausea and vomiting] are observed).  
0.06 mg ie, 12U – 0.12 mg ie, 24U – 0.16 mg ie, 32U (0.16 mg ie, 32U for 24 weeks). 
• 
High dose: 3 step weekly dose increase (if no significant tolerability issues [example, 
nausea and vomiting] are observed). 
0.06 mg ie, 12U – 0.12 mg ie, 24U – 0.16 mg ie, 32U – 0.20 mg ie, 40U (0.20 mg ie, 40U 
for 23 weeks). 
For liraglutide arm, dose of IMP per administration is liraglutide 1.8 mg daily after dose increase 
(0.6 mg daily for 7 days followed by 1.2 mg daily for 7 days followed by 1.8 mg daily for 24 
weeks). 
For safety and practical reasons, approximately 45 minutes before start of blood sampling on days 
with a full PK and/or meal test an indwelling catheter may be inserted in a peripheral vein of the 
forearm in order to obtain blood samples. Between samplings, the catheter will be locked with a 
mandrel. 
10.1.2.1.1 Baseline Visit 4 (Week 0) 
At this visit, the patient must return to the investigation site in the morning after 8 hours fasting 
not having background therapy (metformin) at home.  
IRT contact 
After the baseline assessments are completed and eligibility confirmed, the Investigator contacts 
IRT for randomization to the study. 
The visit includes: 
• 
Check of exclusion criteria. 
• 
Vital signs and physical examination.  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 61 
• 
Body weight. 
• 
Injection training and check SMPG technique (training as needed throughout the study). 
• 
Diet and life style counseling if not performed at V3. 
• 
Tactipen® dispense.   
• 
Dispensation of IMP.  
• 
Concomitant medication. 
• 
IMP administration:  
- 
The investigator must explain to the patient  the treatment regimen the patient was 
assigned to (ie, SAR425899/matching placebo or liraglutide), 
- 
The dose of IMP will be done on site. 
• 
7-point glucose profile to be conducted on the day prior to randomization beginning in the 
morning. 
• 
12-lead ECG. 
• 
Waist and hip measurements. 
• 
Laboratory assessments performed by the central laboratory: 
- 
HbA1c, 
- 
FPG, 
- 
Fasting insulin for calculation of HOMA- β, HOMA-IR, 
- 
Pregnancy test, 
- 
Clinical chemistry and hematology, 
- 
Lipid panel, 
- 
Ketone bodies, 
- 
Fasting level of adiponectin, 
- 
Amylase/lipase, 
- 
TSH/T3/FT4 
- 
Calcitonin, 
- 
Urinalysis, 
- 
Anti-SAR425899 antibodies, 
- 
Exploratory biomarkers, 
- 
Urinary free-cortisol and creatinine measured in 24h urines. 
• 
The PRO questionnaires will be provided and completed by the patients. 
• 
Recording of AEs. 
• 
Recording of hypoglycemic events (if any). 
An appointment for 1 week later is given to the patient for the phone call visit. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 62 
10.1.2.1.2 Phone call Visit 5 (Week 1) 
The patient is called by the Investigator or qualified designee at a scheduled time. If the call has 
been completed by site staff other than the Investigator, the Investigator has to be consulted if 
AE/SAE is suspected and informed in case AE/SAE occurred. In case of an AE the patient may be 
asked to come to the investigational site, as appropriate. A phone call visit can optionally be 
performed as a clinical visit in case of AE (example, nausea and vomiting), or other reasons. 
During the phone call, the following questions are to be asked:  
• 
Did you experience any new medical event, disease or symptom since the last visit?  
• 
Did you experience any hypoglycemic events or symptoms? 
• 
Did you experience any possible allergic symptoms, or skin reactions? 
• 
Do you feel comfortable in handling the diary, glucometer and IMP injection device or do 
you need any more explanation? 
• 
What is the daily dose you are using?  
• 
Did you experience any changes in a pre-existing medical condition, disease or symptom 
since the last visit? 
• 
Did you miss, change, take or add any new medications (including OAD if appropriate) 
since the last visit? 
If the safety and tolerability are acceptable to the investigator, the study treatment dose should be 
increased to a maintenance dose for low doses patient and to subsequent dose for mid and high 
doses 
The patient is instructed to repeat the same dose daily up to next visit. 
The patient is instructed, in case of occurrence of AE, to contact /return to the site as deemed 
appropriate. 
An appointment for 1 week later is given to the patient. 
10.1.2.1.3 Visit 6 (Week 2) 
The patient should return to the investigational site in the morning in fasting condition 
(at least 8 hours fasting) with the study medication box containing used and unused cartridges, 
pen device, glucometer and the e-diary. 
This visit includes: 
• 
IMP dispense. 
• 
IMP administration. 
• 
Injection training/instruction (if needed). 
• 
IRT contact. 
• 
Recording of AEs. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 63 
• 
Recording of hypoglycemic events (if any). 
• 
Recording of the use or change of any concomitant medications. 
• 
Review of the patient’s diary, compliance with study medication and use of the 
glucometer. 
• 
Recording of the dose of study medication.  
• 
Vital signs. 
• 
Body weight. 
• 
Laboratory assessments performed by the central laboratory: 
- 
HbA1c, 
- 
FPG, 
- 
Anti-SAR425899 antibodies. 
If the safety and tolerability are acceptable to the investigator, the study treatment dose should be 
increased to the maintenance dose for mid dose arms and increased to the subsequent dose for 
high dose. 
The low dose patients are already in maintenance dose 
The patient is instructed to repeat the same dose daily up to next visit. 
The patient is instructed, in case of occurrence of AE, to contact /return to the site as deemed 
appropriate. 
An appointment for 1 week later is given to the patient. 
10.1.2.1.4 Visit 7 (Week 3) 
The patient is called by the Investigator or qualified designee at a scheduled time. If the call has 
been completed by site staff other than the Investigator, the Investigator has to be consulted if 
AE/SAE is suspected and informed in case AE/SAE occurred. In case of an AE the patient may be 
asked to come to the investigational site, as appropriate. A phone call visit can optionally be 
performed as a clinical visit in case of AE (example, nausea and vomiting), or other reasons. 
During the phone call, the following questions are to be asked: 
• 
Did you experience any new medical event, disease or symptom since the last visit?  
• 
Did you experience any hypoglycemic events or symptoms? 
• 
Did you experience any possible allergic symptoms, or skin reactions? 
• 
Do you feel comfortable in handling the diary, glucometer and IMP injection device or do 
you need any more explanation? 
• 
What is the daily dose you are using?  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 64 
• 
Did you experience any changes in a pre-existing medical condition, disease or symptom 
since the last visit? 
• 
Did you miss, change, take or add any new medications (including OAD if appropriate) 
since the last visit? 
If the safety and tolerability are acceptable to the investigator, the study treatment dose should be 
increased to a maintenance dose for high doses. 
Low and mid doses patients are already in maintenance dose. 
The patient is instructed to repeat the same dose daily up to next visit. 
The patient is instructed, in case of occurrence of AE, to contact /return to the site as deemed 
appropriate. 
An appointment for 1 week later is given to the patient. 
10.1.2.1.5  Visit 8 (Week 4) 
The patient should return to the investigational site in the morning in fasting condition (at least 
8 hours fasting) with the study medication box containing used and unused cartridges, pen device, 
glucometer and the diary. 
This visit includes: 
• 
IMP dispense. 
• 
IMP administration: The patient is instructed to repeat the same dose daily.  
• 
IRT contact. 
• 
Recording of AEs. 
• 
Recording of hypoglycemic events (if any). 
• 
Recording of the use or change of any concomitant medications. 
• 
Review of the patient’s diary, compliance with study medication and use of the 
glucometer. 
• 
Injection training /instruction as needed. 
• 
Vital signs 
• 
Body weight. 
• 
12 lead ECG. 
• 
Laboratory assessments performed by the central laboratory: 
- 
HbA1c, 
- 
FPG, 
- 
Clinical chemistry and hematology, 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 65 
- 
Ketone bodies, 
- 
Amylase/lipase, 
- 
Calcitonin, 
- 
Anti-SAR425899 antibodies. 
The patient is instructed, in case of occurrence of AE, to contact /return to the site as deemed 
appropriate. 
10.1.2.1.6 Visits 9 and 11 (Weeks 8 and 20) 
The patient should return to the investigational site in the morning in fasting condition (at least 8 h 
fasting) with the study medication box containing used and unused cartridges, pen device, 
glucometer and the diary. 
This visit includes: 
• 
IMP dispense. 
• 
IRT contact. 
• 
IMP administration: The patient is instructed to repeat the same dose daily. 
• 
Recording of AEs. 
• 
Recording of hypoglycemic events (if any). 
• 
Recording of the use or change of any concomitant medications. 
• 
Review of the patient’s diary, compliance with study medication and use of the 
glucometer. 
• 
Vital signs. 
• 
Body weight. 
• 
Physical examination (only for Visit 9 [Week 8] abbreviated/targeted physical 
examination). 
• 
Injection training/instruction of needed. 
• 
Laboratory assessments performed by the central laboratory: 
- 
HbA1c, 
- 
FPG, 
- 
Amylase/lipase, 
- 
Ketone bodies at Visit 9 (Week 8), and Visit 11(Week 20). 
• 
At Visit 11, provide patient with a urine container and additional appropriate materials to 
collect at home his/her urine for the 24 hours prior to Visit 12 and to bring the urine 
sample to the site at visit 12 for the urinary free-cortisol and creatinine measurement 
The patient is instructed, in case of occurrence of AE, to contact /return to the site as deemed 
appropriate. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 66 
10.1.2.1.7 Visit 10 (Week 14) 
The patient should return to the investigational site in the morning in fasting condition (at least 
8 hours fasting) with the study medication box containing used and unused cartridges, pen device, 
glucometer and the diary. 
The visit includes: 
• 
IMP dispense. 
• 
IMP administration: The patient is instructed to repeat the same dose daily.  
• 
Recording of AEs. 
• 
Recording of hypoglycemic events (if any). 
• 
Recording of the use or change of any concomitant medications. 
• 
Review of the patient’s diary, compliance with study medication and use of the 
glucometer. 
• 
Injection training/instruction if needed. 
• 
Vital signs. 
• 
Body weight. 
• 
Diet and life style counseling. 
• 
Physical examination. 
• 
IRT contact. 
• 
7-point glucose profile to be conducted one day on the week prior to visit beginning in the 
morning. 
• 
12-lead ECG. 
• 
Holter monitor if applicable (subset of patients). 
• 
Waist and hip measurements. 
• 
Laboratory assessments performed by the central laboratory: 
- 
HbA1c, 
- 
FPG, 
- 
Fasting insulin for calculation of HOMA-β, HOMA-IR, 
- 
Pregnancy test, 
- 
Clinical chemistry and hematology, 
- 
Lipid panel, 
- 
Ketone bodies, 
- 
Fasting level of adiponectin, 
- 
Amylase/lipase, 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 67 
- 
Calcitonin, 
- 
Urinalysis, 
- 
Anti-SAR425899 antibodies. 
PK sampling will be collected (sparse or full if applicable) (Section 9.3.1.1). 
The patient is instructed, in case of occurrence of AE, to contact /return to the site as deemed 
appropriate. 
An appointment for the next visit is given to the patient. 
10.1.2.1.8 End of treatment Visit 12 (Week 26) 
The patient should return to the investigational site in the morning in fasting condition (at least 
8 hours fasting) with the study medication box containing used and unused cartridges, pen device, 
glucometer and the diary. 
The visit includes:  
• 
Recording of AEs. 
• 
Recording of hypoglycemic events (if any). 
• 
IRT contact. 
• 
Recording of the use or change of any concomitant medications. 
• 
Review of the patient’s diary, compliance with study medication and use of the 
glucometer. 
• 
Vital signs. 
• 
Body weight. 
• 
Physical examination. 
• 
7-point glucose profile to be conducted on the day prior to visit beginning in the morning. 
• 
12-lead ECG. 
• 
Holter monitor if applicable (subset of patients). 
• 
Standardized meal test with VAS for appetite/satiety in a subset of patients 
(see Section 9.2.1.2.2 and Section 9.2.1.2.7). 
• 
Waist and hip measurements. 
• 
Laboratory assessments performed by the central laboratory: 
- 
HbA1c, 
- 
FPG, 
- 
Fasting insulin for calculation of HOMA-β, HOMA-IR, 
- 
Pregnancy test, 
- 
Clinical chemistry and hematology,  
- 
Lipid panel, 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 68 
- 
Ketone bodies, 
- 
Fasting level of adiponectin, 
- 
Amylase/lipase, 
- 
Calcitonin, 
- 
TSH/T3/FT4 
- 
Urinalysis, 
- 
Anti-SAR425899 antibodies, 
- 
Urinary free-cortisol and creatinine measured in 24 hours urines. 
PK sampling will be collected (sparse or full if applicable) (Section 9.3.1.1). 
PRO questionnaires and PRO qualitative questions will be completed by the patient. 
Exploratory biomarkers.  
The patient is instructed, in case of occurrence of AE, to contact /return to the site as deemed 
appropriate. 
10.1.2.2 Follow up period phone call Visit 13 (3 days FU) 
During the phone call, the following questions should be asked: 
• 
Did you experience any new medical event, disease or symptom since the last visit? 
• 
Did you experience any change in a pre-existing medical event or disease or symptom 
since the last visit? 
• 
Did you change or add any concomitant medication since the last visit? 
All reports of any AEs are recorded. In case of an AE the patient may be asked to come to the 
investigational site, as appropriate, 
All reports of hypoglycemic events (if any) are recorded, in case of a hypoglycemia the patient 
may be asked to come to the investigational site, as appropriate, 
The use or change of any concomitant medications is reported (including rescue therapy). 
Note: This visit should not be performed in case of premature treatment discontinuation. 
IRT is contacted for notification of the end of study. 
10.1.3 Unscheduled visits 
If the target dose is not tolerated, the study treatment can be decreased. Another attempt for dose 
increase may take place within 4 weeks and before week 8 of treatment.  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 69 
 If the safety and tolerability are acceptable to the investigator, the study treatment dose should be 
increased in 1, 2 or 3 weeks depending on the decreased dose  
• 
Low dose: 1 step weekly dose increase (if no significant tolerability issues [example, 
nausea and vomiting] are observed); 0.06 mg ie, 12U – 0.12 mg ie, 24U (0.12mg ie, 24U 
for 25 weeks). 
• 
Mid dose: 2 step weekly dose increase (if no significant tolerability issues [example, 
nausea and vomiting] are observed); 0.06 mg ie, 12U – 0.12 mg ie, 24U – 0.16 mg ie, 32U 
(0.16 mg ie, 32U for 24 weeks). 
• 
High dose: 3 step weekly dose increase (if no significant tolerability issues [example, 
nausea and vomiting] are observed); 0.06 mg ie, 12U – 0.12 mg ie, 24U – 0.16 mg ie, 32U 
– 0.20 mg ie, 40U (0.20 mg ie, 40U for 23 weeks). 
The visits for dose increase could be done by phone (additional phone call visit) or at the site if it 
is corresponding to regular visit. 
During the phone call, the following questions are to be asked: 
• 
Did you experience any new medical event, disease or symptom since the last visit?  
• 
Did you experience any hypoglycemic events or symptoms? 
• 
Did you experience any possible allergic symptoms, or skin reactions? 
• 
Do you feel comfortable in handling the diary, glucometer and IMP injection device or do 
you need any more explanation? 
• 
What is the daily dose you are using?  
• 
Did you experience any changes in a pre-existing medical condition, disease or symptom 
since the last visit? 
• 
Did you miss, change, take or add any new medications (including OAD if appropriate) 
since the last visit? 
The patient is instructed to repeat the same dose daily up to next visit. 
The patient is instructed, in case of occurrence of AE, to contact /return to the site as deemed 
appropriate.  
A phone call visit can optionally be performed as a clinical visit in case of AE (example, nausea 
and vomiting), or other reasons. 
If the visit is at the investigator site, the assessments are those planned in the corresponding visit. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 70 
10.2 
DEFINITION OF SOURCE DATA 
10.2.1 Source data to be found in the patient’s file 
Evaluations that are reported in the eCRF must be supported by appropriately signed identified 
source documentation related but not limited to the following: 
• 
Agreement and signature of informed consent form with the study identification and any 
privacy forms. 
• 
Study identification (name). 
• 
Treatment kit number, dates of administration and doses of SAR42899/placebo 
administration (0.06 mg, 0.12 mg, 0.16 mg, or 0.20 mg) or liraglutide doses of 
administration (0.6 mg, 1.2 mg, 1.8 mg). 
• 
Patient number, confirmation of randomization. 
• 
Medical, surgical, diabetes history, including information on: 
• 
Demography, inclusion and exclusion criteria. 
• 
Comorbidities. 
• 
Last participation in a clinical trial. 
• 
Contraception method for women of child bearing potential. 
• 
Previous and concomitant medication. (including background metformin and rescue 
therapy). 
• 
Dates and times of visits and assessments including examination results. 
• 
Vital signs, height, body weight, laboratory reports. 
• 
Adverse events and follow-up. 
• 
In case of an SAE, the site should file in the source documents at least copies of the 
hospitalization reports and any relevant examination reports documenting the follow-up of 
the SAE. 
• 
Date of premature study discontinuation (if any) and reason. 
Source documentation may be found in the following: 
• 
Patient’s identity. 
• 
Medical history. 
• 
Nursing notes. 
• 
Dietician’s notes. 
• 
Physician’s notes. 
• 
Patient’s diaries. 
• 
Glucometer. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 71 
10.2.2 Source data verification requirements for screen failures 
For screen failure patients, the following source data must be verified: patient’s identification 
details, the informed consent signed by the patient, the study identification (name), dates of study 
visits and the main reasons for screen failure. 
10.3 
HANDLING OF PATIENT TEMPORARY OR PERMANENT TREATMENT 
DISCONTINUATION AND OF PATIENT STUDY DISCONTINUATION  
The IMP should be continued whenever possible.  In case the IMP is stopped, it should be 
determined whether the stop can be made temporarily; permanent IMP discontinuation should be 
a last resort.  Any IMP discontinuation should be fully documented in the eCRF.  In any case, the 
patient should remain in the study as long as possible. 
Pregnancy will lead to definitive treatment discontinuation in all cases.   
10.3.1 Temporary treatment discontinuation with investigational medicinal product(s) 
Temporary treatment discontinuation may be considered by the Investigator because of suspected 
AEs.  Reinitiation of treatment with the IMP will be done under close and appropriate clinical/and 
or laboratory monitoring once the Investigator will have considered according to his/her best 
medical judgment that the responsibility of the IMP(s) in the occurrence of the concerned event 
was unlikely and if the selection criteria for the study are still met (refer to Section 7.1 and 
Section 7.2).   
For all temporary treatment discontinuations, duration should be recorded by the Investigator in 
the appropriate pages of the eCRF.  
Temporary treatment discontinuation decided by the Investigator corresponds to more than 1 dose 
not administered to the patient. 
10.3.2 Permanent treatment discontinuation with investigational medicinal product(s) 
Permanent treatment discontinuation is any treatment discontinuation associated with the 
definitive decision from the Investigator or the patient not to re-expose the patient to the IMP at 
any time. 
10.3.3 List of criteria for permanent treatment discontinuation 
The patients may withdraw from treatment with the IMP if they decide to do so, at any time and 
irrespective of the reason, or this may be the Investigator’s decision. All efforts should be made to 
document the reason(s) for treatment discontinuation and this should be documented in the eCRF. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 72 
Patients may withdraw from treatment with IMP in case of the following reasons: 
• 
At patient’s own request, ie, withdraw of consent for treatment. 
• 
If, in the investigator’s opinion, continuation with the administration of IMP would be 
detrimental to the patient’s well-being. 
• 
At the specific request of the sponsor. 
A patient must withdraw from treatment with IMP in case of the following:  
• 
Intercurent condition that requires discontinuation of IMP: eg, laboratory abnormalities 
(see decision tree and general guidance for the follow up of laboratory abnormalities in 
Appendix C), diagnosis of acute pancreatitis confirmed by gastroenterologic evaluation 
and imaging (see Section 10.6.4), calcitonin value ≥ 50pg/ml (see Section 10.6.6). 
• 
Pregnancy. 
• 
Systemic hypersensitivity reaction.  
Any code-breaking requested by the Investigator will lead to permanent treatment discontinuation. 
Any abnormal laboratory value or ECG parameter will be immediately rechecked for 
confirmation (eg after 24 hours) before making a decision of permanent discontinuation of the 
IMP for the concerned patient.   
Handling of patients after permanent treatment discontinuation 
Patients will be followed-up according to the study procedures specified in this protocol up to the 
scheduled date of study completion, or up to recovery or stabilization of any AE to be followed-
up as specified in this protocol, whichever comes last. 
If possible, and after the permanent discontinuation of treatment, the patients will be assessed 
using the procedure normally planned for the last dosing day with the IMP including a 
pharmacokinetics sample if already scheduled. 
All cases of permanent treatment discontinuation should be recorded by the Investigator in the 
appropriate pages of the eCRF when considered as confirmed. 
10.3.4 Procedure and consequence for patient withdrawal from study 
The patients may withdraw from the study before study completion if they decide to do so, at any 
time and irrespective of the reason. Withdrawal of consent for treatment should be distinguished 
from withdrawal of consent for follow-up visits and from withdrawal of consent for non-patient 
contact follow-up, eg, medical records check. 
If possible, the patients are assessed using the procedure normally planned for the end-of-study 
visit including a pharmacokinetics sample if already scheduled.  
Patients who withdraw should be explicitly asked about the contribution of possible AEs to their 
decision to withdraw consent, and any AE information elicited should be documented.  The site 
should document and sign the reason for the patient’s failure to withdraw consent in writing.  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 73 
All study withdrawals should be recorded by the Investigator in the appropriate screens of the 
eCRF and in the patient’s medical records when considered as confirmed. In the medical record, 
at least the date of the withdrawal and the reason should be documented. 
For patients who fail to return to the site, unless the patient withdraws consent for follow-up, the 
Investigator should make the best effort to recontact the patient (eg, contact patient’s family or 
private physician, review available registries or health care databases), and to determine his/her 
health status, including at least his/her vital status. Attempts to contact such patients must be 
documented in the patient’s records (eg, times and dates of attempted telephone contact, receipt 
for sending a registered letter). 
The statistical analysis plan will specify how these patients lost to follow-up for their primary 
endpoints will be considered. 
Patients who have withdrawn from the study cannot be rerandomized (treated) in the study. Their 
inclusion and treatment numbers must not be reused. 
10.4 
OBLIGATION OF THE INVESTIGATOR REGARDING SAFETY REPORTING 
10.4.1 Definitions of adverse events  
10.4.1.1 Adverse event 
An AE is any untoward medical occurrence in a patient or clinical investigation patient 
administered a pharmaceutical product and which does not necessarily have to have a causal 
relationship with this treatment. 
10.4.1.2 Serious adverse event 
An SAE is any untoward medical occurrence that at any dose: 
• 
Results in death, or, 
• 
Is life-threatening, or, 
Note: The term “life-threatening” in the definition of “serious” refers to an event in which 
the patient was at risk of death at the time of the event; it does not refer to an event which 
hypothetically might have caused death if it were more severe. 
• 
Requires inpatient hospitalization or prolongation of existing hospitalization, or, 
• 
Results in persistent or significant disability/incapacity, or, 
• 
Is a congenital anomaly/birth defect, 
• 
Is a medically important event, 
Medical and scientific judgment should be exercised in deciding whether expedited 
reporting is appropriate in other situations, such as important medical events that may not 
be immediately life-threatening or result in death or hospitalization but may jeopardize the 
patient or may require medical or surgical intervention (ie, specific measures or corrective 
treatment) to prevent one of the other outcomes listed in the definition above. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 74 
Note: The following list of medically important events is intended to serve as a guideline for 
determining which condition has to be considered a medically important event. The list is not 
intended to be exhaustive: 
• 
Intensive treatment in an emergency room or at home for: 
- 
Allergic bronchospasm,  
- 
Blood dyscrasias (ie, agranulocytosis, aplastic anemia, bone marrow aplasia, 
myelodysplasia, pancytopenia, etc),  
- 
Convulsions (seizures, epilepsy, epileptic fit, absence, etc). 
• 
Development of drug dependence or drug abuse. 
• 
ALT >3 x ULN + total bilirubin >2 x ULN or asymptomatic ALT increase >10 x ULN. 
• 
Suicide attempt or any event suggestive of suicidality. 
• 
Syncope, loss of consciousness (except if documented as a consequence of blood 
sampling). 
• 
Bullous cutaneous eruptions. 
• 
Cancers diagnosed during the study. 
• 
Chronic neurodegenerative diseases (newly diagnosed). 
• 
Suspected transmission of an infectious agent. 
10.4.1.3 Adverse event of special interest 
An AESI is an AE (serious or nonserious) of scientific and medical concern specific to the 
Sponsor’s product or program, for which ongoing monitoring and immediate notification by the 
Investigator to the Sponsor is required. Such events may require further investigation in order to 
characterize and understand them.  Adverse events of special interest may be added, modified or 
removed during a study by protocol amendment. 
• 
Pregnancy of a female patient entered in a study as well as pregnancy occurring in a 
female partner of a male subject entered in a study with IMP/NIMP: 
- 
Pregnancy will be recorded as an AESI with immediate notification in all cases, 
- 
It will be qualified as an SAE only if it fulfills one of the seriousness criteria 
(see Section 10.4.1.2), 
- 
In the event of pregnancy in a female participant, IMP should be discontinued, 
- 
Follow-up of the pregnancy in a female participant or in a female partner of a male 
participant is mandatory until the outcome has been determined. 
• 
Symptomatic overdose (serious or nonserious) with IMP/NIMP:  An overdose (accidental 
or intentional) with the IMP/NIMP is an event suspected by the Investigator or 
spontaneously notified by the patient (not based on systematic pen count) and defined as: 
- 
For SAR 425899 and matching placebo: any dose greater than the planned dose 
administered per day during this clinical trial,   
- 
For Liraglutide: any dose greater than the planned dose administred per day during this 
clinical trial, 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 75 
- 
For metformin: any dose greater than the recommended dose administered per day 
during this clinical trial. 
• 
Of note, asymptomatic overdose has to be reported as a standard AE. 
• 
Increase in ALT >3 x ULN (refer to related decision chart in Appendix C). 
• 
Other project specific AESIs: 
- 
In the event of prolongation of QTc interval (automatic measurement) ≥500 ms, 
confirmed by a manual reading by the Investigator or a physician delegated by the 
Investigator using the Fridericia formula for correcting QT, the subject should be 
placed under supervision in a specialized setting.  Investigational medicinal product 
administration must be stopped and appropriate blood samples collected.  Subsequent 
ECG monitoring of the subject should then be performed on a regular and clinically 
responsible basis until the QTc interval returns to a safe value as determined by the 
Investigator in agreement with the Sponsor, 
- 
Persistence of sinus tachycardia (defined as confirmed sinus tachycardia [heart rate 
>100 bpm] in supine position reported at more than 2 visits) and associated with a 
concomitant increase, from baseline, in heart rate of ≥15 beats per minute   
- 
Severe allergic or allergic-like reaction (except local reactions at site of injection), 
- 
Calcitonin ≥20 pg/mL after immediate retest (See Section 10.6.6), 
- 
Amylase or lipase > 2 x ULN after immediate retest (refer to Section 10.6.4.1 and 
Section 10.6.4.2), 
- 
Metabolic acidosis: In the event of metabolic acidosis, patients taking metformin 
should discontinue metformin until event resolution. 
10.4.2 Serious adverse events waived from expedited regulatory reporting to regulatory 
authorities 
Not applicable. 
10.4.3 General guidelines for reporting adverse events 
• 
All AEs, regardless of seriousness or relationship to IMP/NIMP, spanning from the 
signature of the informed consent form until the end of the study as defined by the 
protocol for that patient, are to be recorded on the corresponding page(s) or screen(s) of 
the eCRF. 
• 
Whenever possible, diagnosis or single syndrome should be reported instead of symptoms. 
The Investigator should specify the date of onset, intensity, action taken with respect to 
IMP, corrective treatment/therapy given, additional investigations performed, outcome, 
and his/her opinion as to whether there is a reasonable possibility that the AE was caused 
by the IMP or by the study procedure(s).  
• 
The Investigator should take appropriate measures to follow all AEs until clinical recovery 
is complete and laboratory results have returned to normal, or until progression has been 
stabilized, or until death, in order to ensure the safety of the patients. This may imply that 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 76 
observations will continue beyond the last planned visit per protocol, and that additional 
investigations may be requested by the monitoring team up to as noticed by the Sponsor.  
• 
When treatment is prematurely discontinued, the patient’s observations will continue until 
the end of the study as defined by the protocol for that patient. 
• 
Laboratory, vital signs or ECG abnormalities are to be recorded as AEs only if:  
- 
Symptomatic and/or,  
- 
Requiring either corrective treatment or consultation, and/or,  
- 
Leading to IMP discontinuation or modification of dosing, and/or,  
- 
Fulfilling a seriousness criterion, and/or,  
- 
Defined as an AESI. 
Instructions for AE reporting are summarized in Table 6. 
10.4.4 Instructions for reporting serious adverse events 
In the case of occurrence of an SAE, the Investigator or any designees must immediately: 
• 
ENTER (within 24 hours) the information related to the SAE in the appropriate screens of 
the eCRF; the system will automatically send a notification to the monitoring team after 
approval of the Investigator within the eCRF or after a standard delay. 
• 
SEND (preferably by fax or e-mail) a photocopy of all examinations carried out and the 
dates on which these examinations were performed, to the representative of the monitoring 
team whose name, fax number, and email address appear on the clinical trial protocol. 
Care should be taken to ensure that the patient's identity is protected and the patient's 
identifiers in the clinical trial are properly mentioned on any copy of a source document 
provided to the Sponsor. For laboratory results, include the laboratory normal ranges. 
• 
All further data updates should be recorded in the eCRF as appropriate, and further 
documentation as well as additional information (for laboratory data, concomitant 
medications, patient status, etc) should be sent (by fax or e-mail) to the monitoring team 
within 24 hours of knowledge of the SAE. In addition, every effort should be made to 
further document any SAE that is fatal or life-threatening within a week (7 days) of the 
initial notification. 
• 
A back-up plan (using a paper case report form [CRF] process) is available and should be 
used when the eCRF system does not work. 
Any SAE brought to the attention of the Investigator at any time after the end of the study for the 
patient and considered by him/her to be caused by the IMP with a reasonable possibility, should 
be reported to the monitoring team. 
10.4.5 Guidelines for reporting adverse events of special interest 
For AESIs, the Sponsor must be informed immediately (ie, within 24 hours), as per SAE 
notification guidelines described in Section 10.4.4, even if not fulfilling a seriousness criterion, 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 77 
using the corresponding pages of the CRF (to be sent) or screens in the eCRF. Instructions for AE 
reporting are summarized in Table 6. 
10.4.6 Guidelines for management of specific laboratory abnormalities 
Decision trees for the management of certain laboratory abnormalities by Sanofi are provided in 
Appendix C. 
The following laboratory abnormalities should be monitored, documented, and managed 
according to the related flow chart in protocol appendices.  
• 
Neutropenia. 
• 
Thrombocytopenia. 
• 
ALT increase. 
• 
Acute renal insufficiency. 
• 
Suspicion of rhabdomyolysis. 
Table 6 - Summary of adverse event reporting instructions 
Case Report Form completion 
Event 
category 
Reporting 
timeframe 
Specific events in this category 
AE form 
Safety  
Complementary 
Form 
Other 
specific 
forms 
Adverse Event 
(nonSAE, 
nonAESI) 
Routine 
Any AE that is not SAE or AESI 
Yes 
No 
No 
Serious Adverse 
Event (non-AESI 
or AESI) 
Expedited 
(within 24 hours) 
Any AE meeting seriousness criterion per 
Section 10.4.1.2 
Yes 
Yes 
No 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Adverse Event of 
Special Interest  
Expedited 
(within 24 hours) 
Pregnancy 
Yes 
Yes 
Yes 
 
 
Symptomatic overdose 
Yes 
Yes 
Yes 
 
 
Increase in alanine transaminase (ALT) 
Yes 
Yes 
Yes 
 
 
Prolongation of QTc interval (automatic 
measurement) ≥500 ms 
Yes 
Yes 
No 
 
 
Persistence of sinus tachycardia per 
definition in Section 10.4.1.3 and 
associated with a concomitant increase, 
from baseline, in heart rate of ≥15 beats 
per minute   
Yes 
Yes 
No 
 
 
Severe allergic or allergic-like reaction 
(except local reactions at site of injection) 
Yes 
Yes 
Yes 
 
 
Calcitonin ≥20 pg/mL 
Yes 
Yes 
Yes 
 
 
Amylase/lipase>2xULN 
Yes 
Yes 
Yes 
 
 
Metabolic acidosis 
Yes 
Yes 
No 
 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 78 
10.5 
OBLIGATIONS OF THE SPONSOR 
During the course of the study, the Sponsor will report in an expedited manner: 
• 
All SAEs that are both unexpected and at least reasonably related to the IMP (SUSAR), to 
the regulatory authorities, independent ethics committee (IECs)/institutional review boards 
(IRBs) as appropriate and to the Investigators.   
• 
All SAEs that are expected and at least reasonably related to the IMPs to the regulatory 
authorities, according to local regulations. 
Adverse events that are considered expected will be specified by the reference safety information.  
For safety reason, the treatment code will be unblinded for reporting to the health authorities of 
any suspected unexpected serious adverse reaction (SUSAR), ie, any SAE that is both unexpected 
(per the investigator’s brochure) and reasonably associated with the use of the IMP according to 
either the judgment of the Investigator and/or the Sponsor. 
The Sponsor will report all safety observations made during the conduct of the trial in the clinical 
study report. 
10.6 
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 
10.6.1 Hypoglycemia 
Hypoglycemic events will be categorized as follows: 
• 
Severe hypoglycemia: Severe hypoglycemia is an event requiring third party assistance of 
another person to actively administer carbohydrate, glucagon, or other resuscitative 
actions.  These episodes may be associated with sufficient neuroglycopenia to induce 
seizure, unconsciousness or coma.  Plasma glucose measurements may not be available 
during such an event, but neurological recovery attributable to the restoration of plasma 
glucose to normal is considered sufficient evidence that the event was induced by a low 
plasma glucose concentration.  The definition of severe symptomatic hypoglycemia 
includes all episodes in which neurological impairment was severe enough to prevent 
self-treatment and which were thus thought to place patients at risk for injury to 
themselves or others.  Note that “requires third party assistance” means that the patient 
could not help himself or herself.  Assisting a patient out of kindness, when assistance is 
not required, should not be considered a “requires assistance” incident. 
Severe hypoglycemia will be qualified as a SAE only if it fulfills SAE criteria.  All events 
of seizure, unconsciousness, or coma must be reported as SAEs. 
• 
Documented symptomatic hypoglycemia:  Documented symptomatic hypoglycemia is an 
event during which typical symptoms of hypoglycemia are accompanied by a measured 
plasma glucose concentration of ≤70 mg/dL (3.9 mmol/L).  Clinical symptoms that are 
considered to result from a hypoglycemic episode include: increased sweating, 
nervousness, asthenia/weakness, tremor, dizziness, increased appetite, palpitations, 
headache, sleep disorder, confusion, seizures, unconsciousness, or coma. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 79 
• 
Asymptomatic hypoglycemia: Asymptomatic hypoglycemia is an event not accompanied 
by typical symptoms of hypoglycemia but with a measured plasma glucose concentration 
less than or equal to 70 mg/dL (3.9 mmol/L). 
• 
Probable symptomatic hypoglycemia: Probable symptomatic hypoglycemia is an event 
during which symptoms of hypoglycemia are not accompanied by a plasma glucose 
determination, but was presumably caused by a plasma glucose concentration less than or 
equal to 70 mg/dL (3.9 mmol/L); symptoms treated with oral carbohydrate without a test 
of plasma glucose. 
• 
Relative hypoglycemia: Relative hypoglycemia recently termed “pseudo-hypoglycemia” is 
an event during which the person with diabetes reports any of the typical symptoms of 
hypoglycemia, and interprets the symptoms as indicative of hypoglycemia, but with a 
measured plasma glucose concentration greater than 70 mg/dL (3.9 mmol/L), but 
approaching this level. 
Patients will be instructed to measure finger stick plasma glucose levels prior to the administration 
of carbohydrates whenever symptomatic hypoglycemia is suspected, unless safety considerations 
necessitate immediate glucose rescue prior to confirmation, and then a glucose measurement 
should be performed as soon as safe, with appropriate diary documentation. Details on 
hypoglycemia episodes will be captured in the patient diaries, and patients will contact the sites as 
soon as possible following severe events to review the details and decide on any necessary 
measures to be taken. 
Symptomatic hypoglycemia episodes will be documented on the dedicated hypoglycemia event 
page in the eCRF. Symptomatic hypoglycemia events fulfilling the criteria of a SAE will also be 
documented on AE and SAE forms form in the eCRF. 
10.6.2 Local tolerability at injection site 
In case the Investigator or the patient recognizes any signs of local intolerability at injection site, 
this should be recorded on the standard AE page in the eCRF. 
10.6.3 Allergic or allergic-like reaction 
In case a patient experiences an allergic reaction or an allergic-like reaction, this has to be 
reported as an AE and recorded in the eCRF on the specific AE form for suspected allergic event. 
Virtually all symptoms listed on the allergic reaction complementary form are possible adverse 
reactions that may be allergic in nature and may need to be addressed after medical judgment, 
excluding another etiology than allergy. 
Sometimes, transient injection site reactions, irritant in nature may occur requiring no intervention 
and are of dubious significance.  These reactions would not be considered to be allergic reactions.  
Adverse events that are obviously not of allergic origin (eg, local injection site reactions) should 
not be recorded on the allergic reaction complementary form. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 80 
10.6.4 Monitoring of patients with increased lipase and/or amylase >2 ULN 
Potential safety signals for acute pancreatitis had been identified in the postmarketing experience 
of other GLP-1 receptor agonists.  Therefore, patients enrolled in this study should be followed 
for any suspected pancreatitis, eg, with symptoms and/or signs of acute abdominal distress or 
abnormal levels of pancreatic enzymes.  Serum amylase and lipase concentrations are monitored 
routinely at screening, baseline, and periodically during the study treatment period. 
In the presence of clinical signs and/or symptoms evocative of pancreatitis, eg, persistent 
abdominal pain, which can radiate to the back, often with characteristic positional features, with 
possible occurrence of nausea, vomiting, fever and leucocytosis, further measurement of amylase 
and lipase should be performed.  The clinical signs and/or symptoms should be documented in the 
source data. 
10.6.4.1 Elevation of amylase and/or lipase >2 ULN without clinical signs and/or symptoms 
In any case where amylase and/or lipase are >2 ULN, a retest (centrally assessed as far as 
possible) must be performed as follows: 
• 
An immediate retest have to be performed before reporting it as an AESI. 
• 
If value(s) is/are >2 to 3 ULN: retest within 7 days. 
• 
If value(s) is/are >3 ULN: retest within 48 hours. 
• 
If the value(s) remain(s) >2 ULN upon retesting: amylase and/or lipase levels should be 
retested weekly until values are <2 ULN. 
In case a retest is >2 ULN a gastroenterological evaluation and imaging (ultrasound and/or CT or 
MRI with contrast, as appropriate) must be performed.  Please document in the source data the 
absence of clinical signs and/or symptoms (if clinical signs and/or symptoms develop, please see 
Section 10.6.4.2 below). 
Best clinical judgment is to be used when interpreting elevated serum amylase and lipase levels in 
asymptomatic patients.  Temporary discontinuation of the IMP may be considered in these cases 
if deemed necessary by the Investigator. 
10.6.4.2 Elevation of amylase and/or lipase >2 ULN with clinical signs and/or symptoms 
In the presence of clinical signs and/or symptoms evocative of pancreatitis (as described above) 
associated with elevated amylase and/or lipase, treatment with the IMP should be promptly and at 
least temporarily discontinued pending further clinical evaluation and diagnosis confirmation. 
Clinical signs and/or symptoms are to be documented in the source data.  A laboratory 
determination of amylase and lipase has to be obtained at the time of the event and again within 
48 hours or earlier as clinically indicated.  If the value(s) remain(s) >2 ULN, then amylase and/or 
lipase levels should be retested as described in Section 10.6.4.1 above, or more often if clinically 
indicated. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 81 
A gastroenterologic evaluation and imaging (ultrasound and/or CT or MRI with contrast, as 
appropriate) must be performed.  If a diagnosis of pancreatitis is confirmed, IMP should not be 
restarted and should be permanently discontinued. 
In both cases as described above in Section 10.6.4.1 and Section 10.6.4.2, all laboratory or clinical 
documentations are to be collected.  If the retest confirms lipase and/or amylase values are 
>2 ULN, the event must be reported in the eCRF and on the specific AE form for increased lipase 
and/or amylase >2 ULN”, using the appropriate verbatim: eg, “increased amylase and/or lipase” 
in case of isolated enzyme elevation, “suspected pancreatitis” in the presence of clinical signs 
evocative of pancreatitis if the diagnosis is suspected but cannot be confirmed or excluded, and 
“pancreatitis” if the diagnosis has been confirmed. 
The PSAC will review selected pancreatic events, including pancreatitis, pancreatic neoplasms 
and abnormal levels of amylase or lipase. 
10.6.5 Major Cardiovascular events 
In case a patient experiences a major cardiovascular event, the Investigator, in addition to AE 
reporting on specific AE forms for cardiovascular events, has to collect more detailed information 
on specific complementary forms. Major cardiovascular events will be adjudicated by the CAC in 
a blinded manner at the latest before the database lock. 
Please also refer to Section 6.4.2. 
10.6.6 Management of patients with increased calcitonin values 
During the course of the study, if calcitonin value is found ≥20 pg/mL (5.9 pmol/L), an immediate 
retest have to be performed before reporting it as an AESI: 
• 
A retest should be performed by the central laboratory within 7 days.  In addition, blood 
should be collected and sent to the central laboratory for measurement of: calcium, 
phosphorus, gastrin, thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), and antithyroid peroxidase (anti-
TPO) antibodies. 
• 
The clinical and laboratory documentations listed below are to be collected and recorded 
in source documents as soon as possible: 
- 
Potential false positive circumstances: smoking status, proton-pump inhibitor 
treatments (eg, omeprazole), autoimmune thyroid diseases (Hashimoto’s thyroiditis or 
Grave’s disease), differentiated thyroid cancer, hypercalcemia, hypergastrinemia, 
chronic renal insufficiency (not on dialysis), other neuroendocrine tumors (lung small 
cell cancer, intestinal carcinoid), acute pulmonary inflammatory conditions, or sepsis, 
- 
Specific personal and/or familial medical history in relation to thyroid or other 
endocrine diseases, 
- 
Specific physical examination (neck, thyroid gland). 
If the retest confirms that the calcitonin value is ≥20 pg/mL: 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 82 
• 
The event must be reported as an AESI in the eCRF and on the specific AE form and 
specific complementary form for “increased calcitonin ≥20 pg/mL” with all appropriate 
clinical and laboratory documentation. 
• 
An ultrasound scan of the thyroid should be performed and the patient may be referred to a 
thyroid specialist if judged necessary. 
• 
The patient should continue to be followed according to protocol schedule (including 
planned calcitonin measurements).  The specific AE form “increased calcitonin 
≥20 pg/mL (5.9 pmol/L)” should be updated with any new information collected during 
the follow up. 
If at any time during further follow up a calcitonin value ≥50 pg/mL (14.75 pmol/L) is found, the 
patient should be permanently discontinued from IMP (see Section 10.3.3) and referred to a 
specialist.  As far as possible, blood should be collected 1 to 2 weeks after IMP discontinuation 
and sent to the central laboratory for calcitonin measurement. 
If at any time during follow-up a calcitonin value ≥20 pg/mL increases by 20 % or more between 
2 assessments (while remaining below50 pg/mL), a repeated measurement should be performed 
earlier than scheduled in the protocol, ie, 1 month later.  Once results are available, discussion 
with Sponsor should be initiated without delay for further guidance. 
10.6.7 Monitoring of renal function in case of prolonged and severe nausea and vomiting 
In case of prolonged or severe nausea and vomiting, if clinically indicated, serum creatinine 
measurement has to be centrally performed.  If there is an acute increase of serum creatinine, 
metformin has to be discontinued until resolution of renal dysfunction. 
10.6.8 Follow-up of laboratory abnormalities 
Decision trees for the management of certain laboratory abnormalities are provided in Appendix 
C. 
10.7 
ADVERSE EVENTS MONITORING 
All events will be managed and reported in compliance with all applicable regulations, and 
included in the final clinical study report. 
 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 83 
11 
STATISTICAL CONSIDERATIONS 
11.1 
DETERMINATION OF SAMPLE SIZE 
For the primary endpoint of change in HbA1c from baseline to Week 26, a sample size of 
60 patients per arm of SAR425899 and 30 patients in the placebo group (pool of the 3 placebo 
arms) will provide 80% power to detect a difference of 0.7% in the HbA1c change from baseline to 
Week 26 between a dose group of SAR425899 and placebo (SD 1.1%; 5% significance level 
2-sided). 
The total sample size will be 270 patients to be randomized over 7 arms: 3 SAR425899 treatment 
arms with 3 different dose levels (60 patients per arm), 3 matching SAR425899 placebo treatment 
arms (10 patients per arm; 30 patients total), and 1 liraglutide arm (active comparator arm with 
60 patients).  
For the biostatistical analyses, data from the 3 SAR425899 placebo arms will be pooled into 
1 placebo group (30 patients total). 
11.2 
DISPOSITION OF PATIENTS 
The total number of patients for each of the following categories will be presented in the clinical 
study report: 
• 
Screened patients: patients who signed the informed consent.  
• 
Randomized patients: patients with a treatment kit number allocated and recorded in IRT 
database, regardless of whether the treatment kit was used or not. 
• 
Safety population: randomized and treated patients. 
• 
Intent-to-treat (ITT) population: as defined in Section 11.3.1.1 and analyzed as 
randomized. 
• 
PK population: as defined in Section 11.3.3. 
• 
The randomization strata screening HbA1c value (<8%, ≥8%) and Visit 4 (Day 1) BMI 
(<35.0 kg/m2, ≥35.0 kg/m2) assigned by IRT will be summarized.  The discrepancy 
between the strata assigned by IRT and the information reported on the eCRF will be 
listed for all randomized patients. 
• 
Patients who have completed the 26-week treatment period. 
• 
Patients who discontinued the IMP during the 26-week treatment period, and the reasons 
for treatment discontinuation. 
For all categories of patients except screened patients, percentages will be calculated using the 
number of randomized patients as denominator for each treatment group. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 84 
A list of patients prematurely discontinued from the treatment, along with reasons for 
discontinuation, will be provided. 
Patients treated but not randomized, patients randomized but not treated and patients randomized 
but not treated as randomized will be identified and described in separate listings. A Patient of the 
second category (randomized but not treated) will be part of efficacy analyses if the patient has 
both a baseline assessment and at least 1 post baseline assessment of efficacy.  Patients of the 
third category (randomized and not treated as randomized) will be part of efficacy and safety 
analyses.  
For any patient randomized more than once, only the data associated with the first randomization 
will be used in any analysis population. The safety experience associated with any later 
randomization will be assessed separately. 
The safety experience of patients treated and not randomized will be reported separately, and 
these patients will not be in the safety population. 
11.3 
ANALYSIS POPULATIONS 
11.3.1 Efficacy populations 
Efficacy analyses will be based on the treatment group allocated by the IRT according to the 
randomization schedule at randomization visit (as randomized), irrespective of the treatment 
actually received. 
11.3.1.1 Intent-to-treat population 
Efficacy analyses will be based on the ITT population, defined as all randomized patients. 
11.3.2 Safety population 
Safety analyses will be based on the safety population, defined as all randomized patients who 
receive at least 1 dose of IMP. Patients will be analyzed for safety analyses according to the 
treatment actually received.  For a patient randomized to a SAR425899 treatment arm, the patient 
will be analyzed in the treatment he/she receives starting Week 8 visit (inclusive) when no 
adjustment of dose level is allowed. However, for a patient randomized to a SAR425899 
treatment arm and discontinues the IMP before Week 8 visit, the patient will be analyzed in the 
SAR425899 treatment arm the patient is randomized to. If a patient is exposed to more than one 
dose level of SAR425899 since Week 8 visit or later, then the patient will be analyzed in the 
lowest dose level that the patient is exposed from Week 8 visit or later. If a patient is treated with 
both placebo and SAR425899 any time during the study, the patient will be analyzed in the 
SAR425899 treatment arm.  Liraglutide patients will be included in the Liraglutide treatment arm 
regardless of dose amount patients receive. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 85 
In addition: 
• 
Nonrandomized but treated patients will not be part of the safety population, but their 
safety data will be presented separately.  
• 
Randomized patients for whom it is unclear whether they took the study medication will 
be included in the safety population as randomized. 
• 
Patients will be excluded from the safety population only if there is documented evidence 
(ie, all study dates recorded as no medication taken) that patients have not taken the study 
medication. 
11.3.3 Pharmacokinetic population  
For PK analyses, the PK population is defined as all randomized and treated patients who 
contribute with at least 1 valid plasma concentration of SAR425899.  
11.3.4 Patient-reported outcome population 
The analysis of PROs will be conducted on the ITT population. 
11.4 
STATISTICAL METHODS 
Continuous data will be summarized by treatment group using the number of observations 
available (N), mean, standard deviation (SD), minimum, median, and maximum. 
Categorical data will be summarized by treatment group using count and percentage. 
In general, descriptive statistics of quantitative efficacy and safety parameters (result and change 
from baseline) by scheduled visits will be provided on observed cases (OCs), ie, inclusion of only 
patients having nonmissing assessments at a specific visit. 
11.4.1 Extent of study treatment exposure and compliance 
The extent of study treatment exposure and compliance will be assessed and summarized by 
actual treatment received within the safety population. 
11.4.1.1 Extent of investigational medicinal product exposure 
The extent of study treatment exposure will be assessed by the duration of treatment exposure 
during the study. 
The duration of treatment exposure will be the total number of days of administration of the IMP, 
regardless of unplanned intermittent discontinuations.  The duration of IMP exposure will be 
calculated as: 
(Date of the last IMP injection – Date of the first IMP injection) + 1 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 86 
The number (%) of patients randomized and exposed to the IMP will be presented by specific 
time periods for each treatment group in the safety population.  The time periods of interest are 
grouped as follows: 
• 
1 to 14 days. 
• 
15 to 28 days. 
• 
29 to 56 days. 
• 
57 to 98 days. 
• 
99 to 182 days. 
• 
>182 days. 
Descriptive statistics of duration of treatment exposure (number, mean, SD, minimum, median, 
and maximum) and cumulative exposure in patient-year will also be presented by treatment group 
in the safety population. 
11.4.1.2 Compliance 
Overall treatment compliance is defined as the actual number of days with IMP injection 
compared to the planned number of days with IMP injection during the treatment period up to 
treatment discontinuation.  It is calculated according to the following formula: 
Compliance rate (%) = 
 
100
injection
 
IMP
 
 with
days
 
of
number 
 
Planned
injection
 
IMP
 
 with
days
 
of
number 
 
Total
×
⎥⎦
⎤
⎢⎣
⎡
 
Treatment compliance will be summarized by treatment group using mean, SD, median, and range 
for the safety population.  In addition, the percentage of patients who have <60%, ≥60 to <80%, 
≥80 to ≤100%, and >100% compliance will be summarized by treatment group. 
11.4.2 Analyses of efficacy endpoints 
Efficacy analyses will be performed on the ITT population. 
The statistical test will be two-sided tests at the 5% significance level. 
11.4.2.1 Analysis of primary efficacy endpoint(s) 
11.4.2.1.1 Primary analysis 
The primary efficacy endpoint of change in HbA1c from baseline to Week 26 will be analyzed 
with missing values imputed by Control-based multiple imputation method under the missing not 
at random frame work. 
• 
For placebo group patients, missing data will be imputed based on the placebo group data. 
• 
For patients in the SAR425899 groups, missing data will be imputed as if the patients were 
on placebo group throughout the study. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 87 
Each of the complete dataset will be analyzed by the Analysis of Covariance (ANCOVA) model 
with treatment groups (SAR425899 0.12 mg, SAR425899 0.16 mg, SAR425899 0.20 mg, placebo 
and liraglutide), randomization strata of screening HbA1c value (<8, ≥8 %), randomization strata 
of Visit 4 (Day 1) BMI (<35.0 kg/m2, ≥35.0 kg/m2), and country as fixed effects, and baseline 
HbA1c value as a covariate. Results from each complete dataset will be combined to provide the 
adjusted mean change in HbA1c from baseline to Week 26 for each treatment group, as well as 
the between-group difference (comparing each SAR425899 dose group versus placebo) and the 
95% CI for the difference. The overall Type 1 error for multiple comparisons of the primary 
efficacy endpoint will be controlled by a step-down testing procedure as detailed in Section 
11.4.2.3. 
The ANCOVA model will be implemented using statistical analysis system (SAS®) (Version 9.4 
or higher) MIXED procedure (PROC MIXED). 
HbA1c values at baseline and Week 26 (observed or imputed) regardless of treatment 
discontinuation or initiation of rescue therapy will be used. 
11.4.2.1.2 Sensitivity analyses 
For the primary efficacy endpoint, sensitivity analyses will be conducted by differently handling 
missing data under the Missing Not at Random (MNAR) assumption. 
11.4.2.1.3 Summary statistics at scheduled visits 
Summary statistics (for screening value, baseline value, observed values, and observed changes 
from baseline) at scheduled visits (using OC) will be provided for each treatment group. The 
summary will include the number of observations, mean, SD, SE, minimum, median, and 
maximum. Graphical presentations will also be used to examine trends over time using mean 
values (±SE) and mean changes from baseline (±SE) at each of the scheduled visits (using OC). 
11.4.2.2 Analyses of secondary efficacy endpoints 
Descriptive statistics (number, mean, standard deviation, median, minimum, and maximum) will 
be provided by treatment for all continuous secondary variables at the scheduled visits. 
All continuous secondary efficacy endpoints at Week 26 defined in Section 9.2.1 will be analyzed 
using the same ANCOVA model with missing values imputed by Control-based multiple 
imputation method as described in Section 11.4.2.1 to compare each SAR425899 dose group with 
placebo. This model will include fixed effect terms of treatment groups (SAR425899 0.12 mg, 
SAR425899 0.16 mg, SAR425899 0.20 mg, placebo and liraglutide), randomization strata of 
screening HbA1c value (<8, ≥8 %), randomization strata of Visit 4 (Day 1) BMI (<35.0 kg/m2, 
≥35.0 kg/m2), and country, and the covariate of baseline value. Means and adjusted means of each 
treatment group will be provided, as well as adjusted mean and associated two-sided 95% CI of 
the differences between each SAR425899 dose group and placebo. The analyses include values at 
baseline and Week 26 (observed or imputed) regardless of treatment discontinuation or initiation 
of rescue therapy. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 88 
All categorical secondary efficacy endpoints defined in Section 9.2.1 will be analyzed using a 
Cochran-Mantel-Haenszel (CMH) method stratified on randomization strata of screening HbA1c 
value (<8, ≥8 %) and randomization strata of Visit 4 (Day 1) BMI(<35.0 kg/m2, ≥35.0 kg/m2). 
The proportion in each treatment group will be provided, as well as the difference of proportions 
between each SAR425899 dose group and placebo with associated 2-sided 95% CI. For HbA1c 
(<6.5%, <7% respectively at Week 26) and body weight (≥5%, ≥10% body weight loss 
respectively from baseline at Week 26 ) responders, all values at Week 26 will be used to 
determine whether a patient is a responder or not, even if they are measured after IMP 
discontinuation or rescue medication use. Patients who have no measurement at Week 26 will be 
treated as non-responders. 
For percentage of patients requiring rescue therapy, patients who have received rescue therapy 
during the 26-week treatment period will be summarized.  
For HbA1c and body weight responders, a sensitivity analysis will be performed treating patients 
as non-responders if they receive rescue therapy, or have no measurement at Week 26. The 
sensitivity analysis includes measurement at Week 26, regardless of treatment discontinuation. 
11.4.2.3 Multiplicity considerations 
To control the type I error, a step-down testing procedure will be applied.  The testing procedure 
will be performed to test the primary and secondary efficacy variables (HbA1c and body weight) 
by the following prioritized order. The test stop as soon as an endpoint is found not statistically 
significant at α=0.05 (2-sided). 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 89 
Figure 1 - The step-down testing procedure 
 
No multiplicity adjustment will be made on other secondary efficacy variables other than body 
weight. 
11.4.3 Analyses of safety data 
The summary of safety results will be presented by treatment group. 
All safety analyses will be performed on the safety population as defined in Section 11.3.2 using 
the following common rules: 
The baseline value is defined as the last available value prior to the first injection of IMP. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 90 
The following definitions will be applied to laboratory parameters, vital signs and ECG. 
• 
The potentially clinically significant abnormality (PCSA) values for clinical laboratory 
tests,vital signs and ECG are defined as abnormal values considered medically important 
by the Sponsor’s Global Pharmacovigilance and Epidemiology department and in effect at 
the time of the final statistical analysis plan approval.  Potentially clinically significant 
abnormality criteria for parameters not cited in the protocol as safety parameters will not 
be analyzed. 
• 
Potentially clinically significant abnormality criteria will determine which patients had at 
least 1 PCSA during the on-treatment period, taking into account all evaluations 
performed during the on-treatment period, including unscheduled or repeated evaluations.  
The number of all such patients will be the numerator for the on-treatment PCSA 
percentage. 
The “observation period” defined in Section 9.2.2 are applicable for classification of AEs, 
determination of on-treatment PCSA values and the last on-treatment value for the laboratory, 
vital sign and ECG parameters. 
11.4.3.1 Analyses of hypoglycemia 
The number (%) of patients and rate in patient years (2 types: the number of patients with events 
or the total number of events per 100 patient-year) of each type of hypoglycemia (severe, 
documented, asymptomatic, probable and relative hypoglycemia) will be summarized by 
treatment group.  The pattern of symptomatic hypoglycemia occurrence over time will also be 
assessed, as appropriate. An overall hypoglycemia (includes severe, documented, asymptomatic, 
probable and relative) table will also be provided.  
11.4.3.2 Analyses of adverse events 
Pretreatment AEs are AEs that developed or worsened or became serious during the pretreatment 
period. 
Treatment-emergent AEs (TEAEs) are AEs that developed or worsened (according to the 
Investigator’s opinion) or became serious during the on-treatment period. 
Posttreatment AEs are AEs that developed or worsened or became serious during the 
posttreatment period. 
The primary focus of AE reporting in the clinical study report will be on TEAEs.  Pre- and 
posttreatment AEs will be described separately. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 91 
All adverse events 
AE incidence tables will present by SOC (sorted by internationally agreed order), HLGT, HLT 
and PT sorted in alphabetical order for each treatment group, the number (n) and percentage (%) 
of patients experiencing an AE.  Multiple occurrences of the same event in the same patient will 
be counted only once in the tables within a treatment phase.  The denominator for computation of 
percentages is the safety population within each treatment group. 
Summaries of all TEAEs in each treatment group will include: 
• 
The overview of AEs, summarizing number (%) of patients with any 
- 
TEAE, 
- 
serious TEAE, 
- 
TEAE leading to death, 
- 
TEAE leading to permanent treatment discontinuation. 
• 
The number (n) and percentage (%) of patients with at least 1 TEAE by primary SOC, 
HLGT, HLT and PT. 
• 
Summary of TEAEs by maximal severity (severe, moderate, mild), presented by primary 
SOC and PT. 
• 
Summary of TEAEs possibly related to IMP, presented by primary SOC, HLGT, HLT and 
PT. 
A detailed listing of TEAE summaries will be provided in the statistical analysis plan. 
Death and serious adverse events 
Death and treatment-emergent SAEs will be summarized and presented as number and percent of 
patients in each treatment group. 
The following deaths summaries will be generated: 
• 
Number (%) of patients who died by study period (TEAE, on-study) summarized on the 
safety population by treatment received. 
• 
Death in nonrandomized patients or randomized and not treated patients. 
• 
TEAE leading to death (death as an outcome on the AE eCRF page as reported by the 
Investigator) by primary SOC , HLGT, HLT and PT showing number (%) of patients 
sorted by internationally agreed order of SOC and alphabetic order of HLGT, HLT, and 
PT. 
Adverse events leading to permanent treatment discontinuation 
Treatment-emergent AEs leading to permanent treatment discontinuation will be summarized and 
presented as number and percent of patients in each treatment group. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 92 
Local tolerability at injection site  
Adverse events related to local intolerability at the injection site will be identified by searching 
the term “injection site” in the PTs coded from the Investigator reported terms.  The number (%) 
of patients with related events will be summarized by treatment group. 
Allergic reactions 
The number (%) of patients with events reported by the investigator on the AE forms for 
suspected allergic event will be summarized by treatment group. All the allergic events reported 
by the Investigators on the AE form for suspected allergic event and its associated complementary 
forms will be listed. 
Increased pancreatic enzymes and pancreatic events 
• 
Increased pancreatic enzymes >2 x ULN: 
- 
The number (%) of patients with events reported on the AE form for increased lipase 
and/or amylase >2 x ULN and its associated complementary forms will be summarized 
by PTs for each treatment group.   
• 
Pancreatic events 
- 
The following will be summarized for each treatment group:  Number (%) of patients 
with events adjudicated by the PSAC as: 1) acute pancreatitis, 2) chronic pancreatitis, 
3) acute exacerbation of chronic pancreatitis, 4) unknown pancreatitis. 
- 
Number (%) of patients with pancreatic neoplasms adjudicated by the PSAC as: 1) 
related to the IMP, 2) possibly related to the IMP, 3) unlikely related to the IMP, 4) not 
related to the IMP. 
All the events sent to PSAC for adjudication will be listed along with the adjudication outcome. 
Major cardiovascular events  
The number (%) of patients with events adjudicated as major cardiovascular events by CAC will 
be summarized by treatment group.  All events reported by the Investigators on the AE forms for 
cardiovascular events and the associated complementary forms (confirmed or not confirmed by 
CAC) will be listed along with the adjudication outcome.  
Increased calcitonin values  
The number (%) of patients with events reported on the AE form for increased calcitonin 
≥ 20 pg/mL and its associated complementary forms will be summarized by PTs for each 
treatment group. 
ALT increase  
The number (%) of patients with events reported on the AE form for ALT increase and its 
associated complementary forms will be summarized by PT for each treatment group. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 93 
11.4.3.3 Analyses of laboratory variables 
The number and percentage of patients with a PCSA at any evaluation during the on-treatment 
period will be summarized for each clinical laboratory test within each treatment group.  The 
summaries will include patients in the safety population who have at least one laboratory test 
performed during the on-treatment period and, when required by the definition of the abnormality, 
with an available baseline value and available laboratory normal ranges. 
Descriptive statistics will be used to summarize the laboratory results and the changes from 
baseline by visit and for the last on-treatment value within each treatment group. 
Shift tables and other tabular and graphical methods may be used to present the results for 
laboratory tests of interest. 
Listings will be provided with flags indicating the out of laboratory range values as well as the 
PCSA values. 
Drug-induced liver injury 
The liver function tests, namely AST, ALT, ALP and total bilirubin are used to assess possible 
drug induced liver toxicity.  The proportion of patients with PCSA values at any postbaseline visit 
by baseline status will be displayed by treatment group for each parameter.  The proportion of 
patients with PCSA values at any post baseline visit will also be displayed by duration of 
exposure for each treatment group only if a tabulation summary is necessary. 
A listing will be provided of possible Hy’s Law cases identified by treatment group (eg, patients 
with any elevated ALT >3 x ULN, and associated with an increase in total bilirubin >2 x ULN) 
with liver-related TEAEs, ALT, AST, ALP, total bilirubin and the following complementary 
parameters, if available:  conjugated bilirubin and prothrombin time / International Normalized 
Ratio (INR) ,creatine phosphokinase, serum creatinine, complete blood count, immunoglobin M 
(IgM) antibodies to hepatitis A virus, IgM antibodies to hepatitis B core antigen, antibodies to 
hepatitis C Virus, and hepatitis C ribonucleic acid, IgM antibodies to cytomegalovirus, and IgM 
antibodies to hepatitis E virus, auto-antibodies: antinuclear, antideoxyribonucleic acid,  
anti-smooth muscle, Epstein-Barr virus, herpes viruses and antiliver/kidney microsomes. 
11.4.3.4 Analyses of vital sign variables 
The number and percentage of patients with a PCSA at any evaluation during the on-treatment 
period will be summarized for each vital sign parameter within each treatment group.  The 
summaries will include patients in the safety population who have at least one parameter to be 
analyzed during the on-treatment period.  When the PCSA definition involves the change from the 
baseline value, patients need also to have a baseline value to be included in the summaries. 
Descriptive statistics will be used to summarize the results and the changes from baseline by visit 
and for the last on-treatment value within each treatment group. 
Tabular and graphical methods may be used to present the results for parameters of interest. 
Listings will be provided with flags indicating the PCSA values. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 94 
11.4.3.5 Analyses of 12 lead electrocardiogram status 
ECG (12-lead ECG) 
For HR, PR-, QRS- and QT-intervals and corrected QT (QTc), number and percentage of patients 
with a PCSA at any evaluation during the on-treatment period will be summarized by treatment 
group. The summaries will include patients in the safety population who have at least one 
parameter to be analyzed during the on-treatment period.  When the PCSA definition involves the 
change from the baseline value, patients need also to have a baseline value to be included in the 
summaries. 
Descriptive statistics will be used to summarize the results and the changes from baseline by visit 
and for the last on-treatment value within each treatment group. 
Tabular and graphical methods may be used to present the results for parameters of interest. 
Listings will be provided with flags indicating the PCSA values. 
A listing of subjects with at least one abnormality in qualitative assessment (ie, abnormal ECG) 
during the on-treatment period will be also provided. 
24-hours Holter ECG 
For 24-hour average and night time average heart rate, descriptive statistics will be used to 
summarize the results and the changes from baseline by visit and for the last on-treatment value 
within each treatment group. 
Tabular and graphical methods may be used to present the results for parameters of interest. 
11.4.3.6 Analyses of antidrug antibody variables 
Analyses of antibody variables will be performed on the safety population (only in patients from 
SAR treatment arms). 
The number and percentage of patients by antibody status will be listed and summarized by 
treatment group and visit, as well as the percentage of conversion from negative to positive status 
from baseline to Week 26. 
Antibody levels (titer or concentration) will be listed and summarized by treatment group and visit 
using descriptive statistics by N, geometric mean, coefficient of variation, median, minimum and 
maximum. 
11.4.4 Analyses of pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic variables 
11.4.4.1 Analyses of pharmacokinetic variables  
SAR425899 plasma concentrations of patients in the SAR425899 groups will be listed and 
summarized by visit and time window and by antibody status in the PK population, using 
descriptive statistics by N, geometric mean, coefficient of variation, median, minimum and 
maximum. 
Population PK modeling will be performed. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 95 
11.4.4.2 Analysis of the pharmacodynamics variables 
Analysis of the pharmacodynamics biomarkers 
The analysis of pharmacodynamics biomarkers will be conducted on the ITT population. 
Descriptive statistics will be used to summarize the results and the changes from baseline by visit 
within each treatment group. 
11.4.5 Analyses of patient reported outcomes (health-related quality of life/health 
economics variables) 
11.4.5.1 Analysis of PRO questionnaires (WRSM, APPADL and IW-SP) 
Change from baseline at Week26 will be provided for the WRSM, APPADL and IW-SP total 
scores, and will be analyzed using ANCOVA with missing values imputed by Control-based 
multiple imputation method as described in Section 11.4.2.1 to compare each SAR425899 dose 
group with placebo. This model will include treatment group, randomization strata of screening 
HbA1c value (<8, ≥8 %), randomization strata of Visit 4 (Day 1) BMI (<35.0 kg/m2, 
≥35.0 kg/m2), and country as fixed effects, and a covariate using the corresponding baseline value. 
Mean and adjusted means of each treatment group will be provided, as well as adjusted mean and 
associated two-sided 95% CI of the difference between each SAR425899 dose group and placebo. 
The values at Week 26 regardless of treatment discontinuation or initiation of rescue therapy will 
be used in these analyses. 
11.4.5.2 Analysis of the patient qualitative assessment of the treatment 
Patients’ answers to the 3 open-ended questions will be analyzed qualitatively using a qualitative 
data analysis software. This qualitative thematic analysis of patients answers will be based on 
grounded theory methods and involve creating codes corresponding to concepts and sub-concepts 
identified in the text. A global synthesis will establish the most relevant concepts reported by the 
patients (benefits, disadvantages and reasons to continue or not the drug). Additional descriptive 
statistics will be provided on the closed-ended questions. The analyses method for this exploratory 
analysis will be provided in a separate SAP and the analyses results will be documented in a 
separate report. 
11.5 
INTERIM ANALYSIS 
An interim analysis for body weight will be conducted when 108 patients (about 24 patients per 
dose arm of SAR425899 and liraglutide and 12 patients from the SAR425899 placebo arm) have 
been randomized and completed 14 weeks of treatment. Descriptive statistics will be used to 
summarize the body weight results and the changes from baseline by visit for each treatment 
group. Potentially an interim analysis for PK/PD will be conducted when 60% of patients have 
completed the end of treatment visit. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 96 
An internal Sponsor team, independent of the study team, will perform the analysis, which is for 
internal project planning purposes.  It will not lead to changes in the conduct of this protocol.  
Only those necessary for the analysis and project planning will have the access to the interim 
analysis results before study completion.  Study team and investigational sites will continue to be 
blinded to individual randomization codes except for the open-label liraglutide until after study 
completion and database lock.  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 97 
12 
ETHICAL AND REGULATORY CONSIDERATIONS 
12.1 
ETHICAL AND REGULATORY STANDARDS 
This clinical trial will be conducted by the Sponsor, the Investigator, and delegated Investigator 
staff and Subinvestigator, in accordance with consensus ethics principles derived from 
international ethics guidelines, including the Declaration of Helsinki, and the ICH guidelines for 
good clinical practice (GCP), all applicable laws, rules and regulations. 
This clinical trial will be recorded in a free, publicly accessible, internet-based registry, no later 
than 21 days after the first patient enrollment, in compliance with applicable regulatory 
requirements and with Sanofi public disclosure commitments.  
12.2 
INFORMED CONSENT 
The Investigator (according to applicable regulatory requirements), or a person designated by the 
Investigator, and under the Investigator's responsibility, should fully inform the patient of all 
pertinent aspects of the clinical trial including the written information giving approval/favorable 
opinion by the ethics committee (IRB/IEC).  All participants should be informed to the fullest 
extent possible about the study, in language and terms they are able to understand. 
Prior to a patient’s participation in the clinical trial, the written informed consent form should be 
signed, name filled in and personally dated by the patient or by the patient’s legally acceptable 
representative, and by the person who conducted the informed consent discussion. A copy of the 
signed and dated written informed consent form will be provided to the patient.  
Prior to collection of blood for the optional PK and PD assessments, the optional substudy  
informed consent forms (written) should be signed, name filled in, and personally dated by the 
patient or by the subject’s legally acceptable representative, and by the person who conducted the 
informed consent discussion. A copy of the signed and dated written optional informed consent 
form will be provided to the subject.   
The informed consent form the optional substudy informed consent forms used by the Investigator 
for obtaining the patient's informed consent must be reviewed and approved by the Sponsor prior 
to submission to the appropriate ethics committee (IRB/IEC) for approval/favorable opinion. 
12.3 
HEALTH AUTHORITIES AND INSTITUTIONAL REVIEW BOARD/INDEPENDENT 
ETHICS COMMITTEE   
As required by local regulation, the Investigator or the Sponsor must submit this clinical trial 
protocol to the health authorities (competent regulatory authority) and the appropriate IRB/IEC, 
and is required to forward to the respective other party a copy of the written and dated 
approval/favorable opinion signed by the chairman with IRB/IEC composition. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 98 
The clinical trial (study number, clinical trial protocol title and version number), the documents 
reviewed (clinical trial protocol, informed consent form, Investigator’s Brochure, Investigator’s 
curriculum vitae [CV], etc) and the date of the review should be clearly stated on the written 
(IRB/IEC) approval/favorable opinion. 
The IMP will not be released at the study site and the Investigator will not start the study before 
the written and dated approval/favorable opinion is received by the Investigator and the Sponsor. 
During the clinical trial, any amendment or modification to the clinical trial protocol should be 
submitted to the health authorities (competent regulatory authority), as required by local 
regulation, in addition to the IRB/IEC before implementation, unless the change is necessary to 
eliminate an immediate hazard to the patients, in which case the health authorities (competent 
regulatory authority) and the IRB/IEC should be informed as soon as possible. They should also 
be informed of any event likely to affect the safety of patients or the continued conduct of the 
clinical trial, in particular any change in safety.  All updates to the Investigator’s Brochure will be 
sent to the IRB/IEC and to health authorities (competent regulatory authority), as required by 
local regulation. 
A progress report is sent to the IRB/IEC at least annually and a summary of the clinical trial’s 
outcome at the end of the clinical trial.  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 99 
13 
STUDY MONITORING 
13.1 
RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE INVESTIGATOR(S) 
The Investigator is required to ensure compliance with all procedures required by the clinical trial 
protocol and with all study procedures provided by the Sponsor (including security rules). The 
Investigator agrees to provide reliable data and all information requested by the clinical trial 
protocol (with the help of the eCRF, Discrepancy Resolution Form [DRF] or other appropriate 
instrument) in an accurate and legible manner according to the instructions provided and to ensure 
direct access to source documents by Sponsor representatives. 
If any circuit includes transfer of data particular attention should be paid to the confidentiality of 
the patient's data to be transferred. 
The Investigator may appoint such other individuals as he/she may deem appropriate as 
Subinvestigators to assist in the conduct of the clinical trial in accordance with the clinical trial 
protocol.  All Subinvestigators shall be appointed and listed in a timely manner.  The 
Subinvestigators will be supervised by and work under the responsibility of the Investigator.  The 
Investigator will provide them with a copy of the clinical trial protocol and all necessary 
information. 
13.2 
RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE SPONSOR 
The Sponsor of this clinical trial is responsible to regulatory authorities for taking all reasonable 
steps to ensure the proper conduct of the clinical trial as regards ethics, clinical trial protocol 
compliance, and integrity and validity of the data recorded on the eCRFs. Thus, the main duty of 
the monitoring team is to help the Investigator and the Sponsor maintain a high level of ethical, 
scientific, technical and regulatory quality in all aspects of the clinical trial. 
At regular intervals during the clinical trial, the site will be contacted, through monitoring visits, 
letters or telephone calls, by a representative of the monitoring team to review study progress, 
Investigator and patient compliance with clinical trial protocol requirements and any emergent 
problems.  These monitoring visits will include but not be limited to review of the following 
aspects: patient informed consent, patient recruitment and follow-up, SAE documentation and 
reporting, AESI documentation and reporting, AE documentation, IMP allocation, patient 
compliance with the IMP regimen, IMP accountability, concomitant therapy use and quality of 
data.  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 100 
13.3 
 SOURCE DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS 
According to the ICH GCP, the monitoring team must check the CRF entries against the source 
documents, except for the pre-identified source data directly recorded in the CRF. The informed 
consent form will include a statement by which the patient allows the Sponsor’s duly authorized 
personnel, the ethics committee (IRB/IEC), and the regulatory authorities to have direct access to 
original medical records which support the data on the CRFs (eg, patient's medical file, 
appointment books, original laboratory records, etc). These personnel, bound by professional 
secrecy, must maintain the confidentiality of all personal identity or personal medical information 
(according to confidentiality and personal data protection rules). 
13.4 
USE AND COMPLETION OF CASE REPORT FORMS (CRFS) AND ADDITIONAL 
REQUEST 
According to the ICH GCP, the monitoring team must check the eCRF entries against the source 
documents, except for the pre-identified source data directly recorded in the eCRF.  The informed 
consent form will include a statement by which the patient allows the Sponsor’s duly authorized 
personnel, the ethics committee (IRB/IEC), and the regulatory authorities to have direct access to 
original medical records which support the data on the eCRFs (eg, patient's medical file, 
appointment books, original laboratory records, etc). These personnel, bound by professional 
secrecy, must maintain the confidentiality of all personal identity or personal medical information 
(according to confidentiality and personal data protection rules). 
It is the responsibility of the Investigator to maintain adequate and accurate eCRFs (according to 
the technology used) designed by the Sponsor to record (according to Sponsor instructions) all 
observations and other data pertinent to the clinical investigation in a timely manner.  All eCRFs 
should be completed in their entirety in a neat, legible manner to ensure accurate interpretation of 
data. 
Should a correction be made, the corrected information will be entered in the eCRF overwriting 
the initial information. An audit trail allows identifying the modification.  
Data are available within the system to the Sponsor as soon as they are entered in the eCRF. 
The computerized handling of the data by the Sponsor may generate additional requests (DRF) to 
which the Investigator is obliged to respond by confirming or modifying the data questioned. The 
requests with their responses will be managed through the eCRF. 
13.5 
USE OF COMPUTERIZED SYSTEMS 
The complete list of computerized systems used for the study is provided in a separate document 
which is maintained in the Sponsor and Investigator study files. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 101 
14 
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 
14.1 
CURRICULUM VITAE 
A current copy of the curriculum vitae describing the experience, qualification and training of 
each Investigator and Subinvestigator will be signed, dated and provided to the Sponsor prior to 
the beginning of the clinical trial. 
14.2 
RECORD RETENTION IN STUDY SITES 
The Investigator must maintain confidential all study documentation, and take measures to 
prevent accidental or premature destruction of these documents. 
The Investigator should retain the study documents at least 15 years after the completion or 
discontinuation of the clinical trial. 
However, applicable regulatory requirements should be taken into account in the event that a 
longer period is required. 
The Investigator must notify the Sponsor prior to destroying any study essential documents 
following the clinical trial completion or discontinuation. 
If the Investigator's personal situation is such that archiving can no longer be ensured by him/her, 
the Investigator shall inform the Sponsor and the relevant records shall be transferred to a 
mutually agreed upon designee.  
14.3 
CONFIDENTIALITY 
All information disclosed or provided by the Sponsor (or any company/institution acting on their 
behalf), or produced during the clinical trial, including, but not limited to, the clinical trial 
protocol, personal data in relation to the patients, the eCRFs, the Investigator's Brochure, and the 
results obtained during the course of the clinical trial, is confidential, prior to the publication of 
results.  The Investigator and any person under his/her authority agree to undertake to keep 
confidential and not to disclose the information to any third party without the prior written 
approval of the Sponsor. 
However, the submission of this clinical trial protocol and other necessary documentation to the 
ethics committee (IRB/IEC) is expressly permitted, the IRB/IEC members having the same 
obligation of confidentiality. 
The Subinvestigators shall be bound by the same obligation as the Investigator. The Investigator 
shall inform the Subinvestigators of the confidential nature of the clinical trial. 
The Investigator and the Subinvestigators shall use the information solely for the purposes of the 
clinical trial, to the exclusion of any use for their own or for a third party's account. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 102 
14.4 
PROPERTY RIGHTS 
All information, documents and IMP provided by the Sponsor or its designee are and remain the 
sole property of the Sponsor. 
The Investigator shall not and shall cause the delegated Investigator staff /Subinvestigator not to 
mention any information or the Product in any application for a patent or for any other intellectual 
property rights. 
All the results, data, documents and inventions, which arise directly or indirectly from the clinical 
trial in any form, shall be the immediate and exclusive property of the Sponsor. 
The Sponsor may use or exploit all the results at its own discretion, without any limitation to its 
property right (territory, field, continuance). The Sponsor shall be under no obligation to patent, 
develop, market or otherwise use the results of the clinical trial. 
As the case may be, the Investigator and/or the Subinvestigators shall provide all assistance 
required by the Sponsor, at the Sponsor's expense, for obtaining and defending any patent, 
including signature of legal documents. 
14.5 
DATA PROTECTION 
• 
The patient's personal data, which are included in the Sponsor database shall be treated in 
compliance with all applicable laws and regulations. 
• 
When archiving or processing personal data pertaining to the Investigator and/or to the 
patients, the Sponsor shall take all appropriate measures to safeguard and prevent access to 
this data by any unauthorized third party. 
• 
The Sponsor also collects specific data regarding Investigator as well as personal data 
from any person involved in the study which may be included in the Sponsor’s databases, 
shall be treated by both the Sponsor and the Investigator in compliance with all applicable 
laws and regulations. 
Subject race or ethnicity (“American Indian or Alaska Native” / “Asian” / “African American” / 
“Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific Islander” / “White”) will be collected in this study because 
these data are required by several regulatory authorities. 
The data collected in this study will only be used for the purpose(s) of the study and to document 
the evaluation of the benefit/risk ratio, efficacy, and safety of the product(s).  They may be further 
processed if they have been anonymized.   
14.6 
INSURANCE COMPENSATION 
The Sponsor certifies that it has taken out a liability insurance policy covering all clinical trials 
under its sponsorship. This insurance policy is in accordance with local laws and requirements. 
The insurance of the Sponsor does not relieve the Investigator and the collaborators from any 
obligation to maintain their own liability insurance policy. An insurance certificate will be 
provided to the IECs/IRBs or regulatory authorities in countries requiring this document.  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 103 
14.7 
SPONSOR AUDITS AND INSPECTIONS BY REGULATORY AGENCIES 
For the purpose of ensuring compliance with the clinical trial protocol, good clinical practice, and 
applicable regulatory requirements, the Investigator should permit auditing by or on the behalf of 
the Sponsor and inspection by regulatory authorities. 
The Investigator agrees to allow the auditors/inspectors to have direct access to his/her study 
records for review, being understood that these personnel is bound by professional secrecy, and as 
such will not disclose any personal identity or personal medical information. 
The Investigator will make every effort to help with the performance of the audits and inspections, 
giving access to all necessary facilities, data, and documents. 
As soon as the Investigator is notified of a planned inspection by the authorities, he will inform 
the Sponsor and authorize the Sponsor to participate in this inspection. 
The confidentiality of the data verified and the protection of the patients should be respected 
during these inspections. 
Any result and information arising from the inspections by the regulatory authorities will be 
immediately communicated by the Investigator to the Sponsor. 
The Investigator shall take appropriate measures required by the Sponsor to take corrective 
actions for all problems found during the audit or inspections. 
14.8 
PREMATURE DISCONTINUATION OF THE STUDY OR PREMATURE CLOSE-OUT OF 
A SITE 
14.8.1 By the Sponsor  
The Sponsor has the right to terminate the participation of either an individual site or the study at 
any time, for any reason, including but not limited to the following:  
• 
The information on the product leads to doubt as to the benefit/risk ratio. 
• 
Patient enrollment is unsatisfactory. 
• 
The Investigator has received from the Sponsor all IMP, means, and information necessary 
to perform the clinical trial and has not included any patient after a reasonable period of 
time mutually agreed upon. 
• 
Noncompliance of the Investigator or Subinvestigator, delegated staff with any provision 
of the clinical trial protocol, and breach of the applicable laws and regulations or breach of 
the ICH GCP. 
• 
The total number of patients are included earlier than expected. 
In any case the Sponsor will notify the Investigator of its decision by written notice. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 104 
14.8.2 By the Investigator 
The Investigator may terminate his/her participation upon thirty (30) days' prior written notice if 
the study site or the Investigator for any reason becomes unable to perform or complete the 
clinical trial.  
In the event of premature discontinuation of the study or premature close-out of a site, for any 
reason whatsoever, the appropriate IRB/IEC and regulatory authorities should be informed 
according to applicable regulatory requirements. 
14.8.3 Clinical trial results 
The Sponsor will be responsible for preparing a clinical study report and to provide a summary of 
study results to the Investigator. 
14.9 
PUBLICATIONS AND COMMUNICATIONS 
The Investigator undertakes not to make any publication or release pertaining to the study and/or 
results of the study prior to the Sponsor’s written consent, being understood that the Sponsor will 
not unreasonably withhold its approval. 
As the study is being conducted at multiple sites, the Sponsor agrees that, consistent with 
scientific standards, a primary presentation or publication of the study results based on global 
study outcomes shall be sought. However, if no multicenter publication is submitted, underway, 
or planned within twelve (12) months of the completion of this study at all sites, the Investigator 
shall have the right to publish or present independently the results of this study in agreement with 
other Investigators and stakeholders. The Investigator shall provide the Sponsor with a copy of 
any such presentation or publication for review and comment at least 30 days in advance of any 
presentation or submission for publication. In addition, if requested by the Sponsor, any 
presentation or submission for publication shall be delayed for a limited time, not to exceed 
90 days, to allow for filing of a patent application or such other justified measures as the Sponsor 
deems appropriate to establish and preserve its proprietary rights.  
The Investigator shall not use the name(s) of the Sponsor and/or its employees in advertising or 
promotional material or publication without the prior written consent of the Sponsor. The Sponsor 
shall not use the name(s) of the Investigator and/or the collaborators in advertising or promotional 
material or publication without having received his/her and/or their prior written consent(s). 
The Sponsor has the right at any time to publish the results of the study. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 105 
15 
CLINICAL TRIAL PROTOCOL AMENDMENTS 
All appendices attached hereto and referred to herein are made part of this clinical trial protocol. 
The Investigator should not implement any deviation from, or changes to the clinical trial protocol 
without agreement by the Sponsor and prior review and documented approval/favorable opinion 
from the IRB/IEC and/or notification/approval of health authorities (competent regulatory 
authority) of an amendment, as required by local regulation, except where necessary to eliminate 
an immediate hazard(s) to clinical trial patients, or when the change(s) involves only logistical or 
administrative aspects of the trial. Any change agreed upon will be recorded in writing, the 
written amendment will be signed by the Investigator and by the Sponsor and the signed 
amendment will be filed with this clinical trial protocol. 
Any amendment to the clinical trial protocol requires written approval/favorable opinion by the 
IRB/IEC prior to its implementation, unless there are overriding safety reasons. 
In case of substantial amendment to the clinical trial protocol, approval from the health authorities 
(competent regulatory authority) will be sought before implementation. 
In some instances, an amendment may require a change to the informed consent form. The 
Investigator must receive an IRB/IEC approval/favorable opinion concerning the revised informed 
consent form prior to implementation of the change and patient signature should be re-collected if 
necessary. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 106 
16 
BIBLIOGRAPHIC REFERENCES 
1. Drucker DJ, Nauck MA.  The incretin system: glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonists and 
dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitors in type 2 diabetes. Lancet. 2006;368:1696-705. 
2. Pollack MF, Purayidathil FW, Bolge SC, Williams SA.  Patient-reported tolerability issues 
with oral antidiabetic agents: Associations with adherence; treatment satisfaction and health-
related quality of life. Diabetes Res Clin Pract. 2010;87:204-10. 
3. Geary N, Kissileff HR, Pi-Sunyer FX, Hinton V. Individual, but not simultaneous, glucagon 
and cholecystokinin infusions inhibit feeding in men. Am J Physiol. 1992;262:R975-80. 
4. Nair KS. Hyperglucagonemia increases resting metabolite rate in man during insulin 
deficiency. J Clin Endocrin Metab.1987;64:896-901. 
5. Kosinski JR, Huber J, Carrington PE, Chicchi GG, Mu J, Miller C, et al. The glucagon 
receptor is involved in mediating the body weight-lowering effects of oxyntomodulin. Obesity. 
2012;20:1566-71. 
6. Laferrere B, Swerdlow N, Bawa B, Arias S, Bose M, Olivan B, et al. Rise of oxyntomodulin 
in response to oral glucose after gastric bypass surgery in patients with type 2 diabetes. J Clin 
Endocrinol Metab. 2010;95:4072-6. 
7. Parlevliet ET, Heijboer AC, Schroder-van der Elst JP, Havekes LM, Romijn JA, Pijl H, et al. 
Oxyntomodulin ameliorates glucose intolerance in mice fed a high-fat diet. Am J Physiol 
Endocrinol Metab. 2008;294:E142-7. 
8. Pocai A, Carrington PE, Adams JR, Wright M, Eiermann G, Zhu L, et al. Glucagon-like 
peptide 1/glucagon receptor dual agonism reverses obesity in mice. Diabetes. 2009;58:2258-
66. 
9. Day JW, Ottaway N, Patterson JT, Gelfanov V, Smiley D, Gidda J, et al.  A new glucagon and 
GLP-1 co-agonist eliminates obesity in rodents. Nat Chem Biol. 2009;5:749-57. 
10. Tan TM, Field BC, McCullough KA, Troke RC, Chambers ES, Salem V, et al. 
Coadministration of glucagon-like peptide-1 during glucagon infusion in humans results in 
increased energy expenditure and amelioration of hyperglycemia. Diabetes. 2013;62:1131-8. 
11. Cegla J, Troke RC, Jones B, Tharakan G,  Kenkre J, McCullough KA, et al.  Coninfusion of 
low-dose GLP-1 and glucagon in man results in a reduction in food intake. Diabetes. 
2014;63:3711-20. 
12. Wynne K, Park AJ, Small CJ, Patterson M, Ellis SM, Murphy KG, et al. Subcutaneous 
Oxyntomodulin reduces body weight in overweight and obese subjects, a double-blind, 
randomized, controlled trial. Diabetes. 2005;54:2390-5. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Amended Clinical Trial Protocol No. 01  
23-Jan-2017 
DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 107 
13. Wynne K, Park AJ, Small CJ, Meeran K, Ghatei MA, Frost GS, et al.  Oxyntomodulin 
increase energy expenditure in addition to decreasing energy intake in overweight and obese 
humans: a randomized controlled trial. Int J Obes. 2006;30:1729-36. 
14. Shankar SS, Shankar R, Mixson L, Pramanik B, Stoch S, Steinber HO, et al. Oxyntomodulin 
has significant acute glucoregulatory effects comparable to liraglutide in subjects with type 2 
diabetes. Abstract #48.EASD 2013. 
15. Seaquist ER, Anderson J, Childs B, Cryer P, Dagogo-Jack S, Fish L, et al. Hypoglycemia and 
diabetes: a report of a workgroup of the American Diabetes Association and the Endocrine 
Society. Diabetes Care. 2013;36:1384-95. 
16. Patrick DL, Bushnell DM, Rothman M. Performance of Two Self-Report Measures for 
Evaluating Obesity and Weight Loss. Obes Res. 2004;12:48-57. 
17. Hayes RP, Nelson DR, Meldahl ML, Curtis BH. Ability to perform daily physical activities in 
individuals with type 2 diabetes and moderate obesity: a preliminary validation of the Impact 
of Weight on Activities of Daily Living Questionnaire. Diabetes Technol Ther. 2011;13:705–
12. 
18. Hayes RP, Schultz EM, Naegeli AN, Curtis BH. Test-retest, responsiveness, and minimal 
important change of the ability to perform physical activities of daily living questionnaire in 
individuals with type 2 diabetes and obesity. Diabetes Technol Ther. 2012;14:1118-25. 
19. Hayes RP, DeLozier AM. Reliability, validity, and responsiveness of the Impact of Weight on 
Self-Perceptions Questionnaire (IW-SP) in individuals with type 2 diabetes and obesity. 
Diabetes Technol Ther. 2015;17:210-4. 
20. Bohm M, Swedberg K, Komajda M et al. Heart rate as a risk factor in chronic heart failure 
(SHIFT): the association between heart rate and outcomes in a randomized placebo-controlled 
trial. Lancet. 2010;376:886-94. 
21. Armstrong MJ, Gaunt P, Aithal GP, Barton D, Hull D, Parker R, et al. Liraglutide safety and 
effi cacy in patients with non-alcoholic steatohepatitis (LEAN): a multicentre, double-blind, 
randomised, placebo-controlled phase 2 study. Lancet. 2016;387:679-90. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)

SAP_001.pdf: 
Any and all information presented in this document shall be treated as confidential and shall remain the exclusive property of Sanofi (or any of its 
affiliated companies). The use of such confidential information must be restricted to the recipient for the agreed purpose and must not be 
disclosed, published or otherwise communicated to any unauthorized persons, for any reason, in any form whatsoever without the prior written 
consent of Sanofi (or the concerned affiliated company); ‘affiliated company’ means any corporation, partnership or other entity which at the date 
of communication or afterwards (i) controls directly or indirectly Sanofi, (ii) is directly or indirectly controlled by Sanofi, with ‘control’ meaning 
direct or indirect ownership of more than 50% of the capital stock or the voting rights in such corporation, partnership or other entity 
According to template: QSD-002643 VERSION 6.0 (06-JUL-2016) 
Page 1
STATISTICAL ANALYSIS PLAN 
A 26-week Randomized, Double-blind, Placebo-controlled, Dose-ranging Phase 2 
Study to Assess the Safety and Efficacy of SAR425899 in Patients with 
Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus 
SAR425899-DRI13940 
STATISTICIAN: 
DATE OF ISSUE: 18-Sep-2017 
Total number of pages: 
84 
(electronic 1.0)
NCT02973321


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 2 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
STATISTICAL ANALYSIS PLAN ...................................................................................................................1 
TABLE OF CONTENTS..................................................................................................................................2 
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITION OF TERMS..........................................................................5 
1 
OVERVIEW AND INVESTIGATIONAL PLAN ................................................................................7 
1.1 
STUDY DESIGN AND RANDOMIZATION ......................................................................................7 
1.2 
OBJECTIVES...................................................................................................................................7 
1.2.1 
Primary objectives............................................................................................................................7 
1.2.2 
Secondary objectives.......................................................................................................................7 
1.2.3 
Exploratory objectives......................................................................................................................8 
1.3 
DETERMINATION OF SAMPLE SIZE.............................................................................................8 
1.4 
STUDY PLAN...................................................................................................................................9 
1.5 
MODIFICATIONS TO THE STATISTICAL SECTION OF THE PROTOCOL................................10 
1.6 
STATISTICAL MODIFICATIONS MADE IN THE STATISTICAL ANALYSIS PLAN .....................11 
2 
STATISTICAL AND ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES ....................................................................14 
2.1 
ANALYSIS ENDPOINTS ...............................................................................................................14 
2.1.1 
Demographic and baseline characteristics ....................................................................................14 
2.1.2 
Prior or concomitant medications...................................................................................................15 
2.1.2.1 
Concomitant diabetes therapy .......................................................................................................16 
2.1.2.2 
Rescue therapy..............................................................................................................................16 
2.1.2.3 
Prohibited concomitant therapy .....................................................................................................17 
2.1.3 
Efficacy endpoints..........................................................................................................................17 
2.1.3.1 
Primary efficacy endpoint(s) ..........................................................................................................18 
2.1.3.2 
Secondary efficacy endpoint(s)......................................................................................................19 
2.1.4 
Safety endpoints ............................................................................................................................20 
2.1.4.1 
Hypoglycemia.................................................................................................................................21 
2.1.4.2 
Adverse events variables...............................................................................................................23 
2.1.4.3 
Deaths............................................................................................................................................25 
2.1.4.4 
Laboratory safety variables............................................................................................................25 
2.1.4.5 
Vital signs variables .......................................................................................................................26 
2.1.4.6 
Physical examination .....................................................................................................................26 
2.1.4.7 
Electrocardiogram variables ..........................................................................................................26 
2.1.4.8 
Holter Monitoring............................................................................................................................26 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 3 
2.1.4.9 
Anti-SAR425899 antibody assessment .........................................................................................26 
2.1.5 
Pharmacokinetic variables .............................................................................................................27 
2.1.6 
Pharmacodynamic biomarkers, NASH and cardiovascular biomarkers........................................27 
2.1.7 
NASH and cardiovascular biomarkers...........................................................................................27 
2.1.8 
Patient reported outcomes.............................................................................................................27 
2.2 
DISPOSITION OF PATIENTS .......................................................................................................30 
2.2.1 
Major deviations related to randomization procedure....................................................................31 
2.3 
ANALYSIS POPULATIONS...........................................................................................................32 
2.3.1 
Efficacy populations .......................................................................................................................32 
2.3.2 
Safety population ...........................................................................................................................32 
2.3.3 
Pharmacokinetic population...........................................................................................................33 
2.3.4 
Pharmacodynamic population........................................................................................................33 
2.3.5 
NASH and cardiovascular biomarkers population .........................................................................33 
2.3.6 
Patient-reported outcome population.............................................................................................33 
2.3.7 
Substudy population.......................................................................................................................33 
2.4 
STATISTICAL METHODS .............................................................................................................34 
2.4.1 
Demographics and baseline characteristics ..................................................................................34 
2.4.2 
Prior or concomitant medications...................................................................................................34 
2.4.3 
Extent of investigational medicinal product exposure and compliance .........................................35 
2.4.3.1 
Extent of investigational medicinal product exposure....................................................................35 
2.4.3.2 
Compliance ....................................................................................................................................35 
2.4.4 
Analyses of efficacy endpoints.......................................................................................................36 
2.4.4.1 
Analysis of primary efficacy endpoint(s) ........................................................................................36 
2.4.4.2 
Analyses of secondary efficacy endpoints.....................................................................................38 
2.4.4.3 
Multiplicity issues ...........................................................................................................................39 
2.4.5 
Analyses of safety data..................................................................................................................40 
2.4.5.1 
Analyses of hypoglycemia .............................................................................................................41 
2.4.5.2 
Analyses of adverse events ...........................................................................................................41 
2.4.5.3 
Deaths............................................................................................................................................44 
2.4.5.4 
Analyses of laboratory variables....................................................................................................45 
2.4.5.5 
Analyses of vital sign variables ......................................................................................................46 
2.4.5.6 
Analyses of 12 lead electrocardiogram variables ..........................................................................47 
2.4.5.7 
24-hours Holter ECG......................................................................................................................47 
2.4.5.8 
Analyses of anti-drug antibody variables .......................................................................................47 
2.4.6 
Analyses of pharmacokinetic variables..........................................................................................48 
2.4.7 
Analyses of pharmacodynamics biomarkers .................................................................................48 
2.4.8 
Analyses of NASH and cadiovascular biomarkers ........................................................................48 
2.4.9 
Analyses of patient reported outcomes (health-related quality of life/health economics 
variables)........................................................................................................................................48 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 4 
2.4.9.1 
Analysis of PRO questionnaires (WRSM, APPADL and IW-SP)...................................................48 
2.4.9.2 
Analysis of the patient qualitative assessment of the treatment....................................................49 
2.5 
DATA HANDLING CONVENTIONS ..............................................................................................49 
2.5.1 
General conventions ......................................................................................................................49 
2.5.2 
Data handling conventions for secondary efficacy variables.........................................................50 
2.5.3 
Missing data...................................................................................................................................50 
2.5.4 
Windows for time points / Measurements for analyses .................................................................53 
2.5.5 
Unscheduled visits .........................................................................................................................55 
2.5.6 
Pooling of centers for statistical analyses......................................................................................55 
2.5.7 
Statistical technical issues .............................................................................................................55 
2.5.8 
Rescued patient data .....................................................................................................................55 
2.5.9 
PRO missing data imputation ........................................................................................................55 
3 
INTERIM ANALYSIS .....................................................................................................................57 
4 
DATABASE LOCK........................................................................................................................59 
5 
SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................60 
6 
REFERENCES...............................................................................................................................61 
7 
LIST OF APPENDICES.................................................................................................................62 
APPENDIX A 
POTENTIALLY CLINICALLY SIGNIFICANT ABNORMALITIES CRITERIA ......................63 
APPENDIX B 
SUMMARY OF STATISTICAL ANALYSES ........................................................................68 
APPENDIX C STUDY FLOWCHART.........................................................................................................71 
APPENDIX D SAMPLE SAS® CODE FOR ANALYSES OF EFFICACY ENDPOINTS.............................75 
APPENDIX E 
PATIENT-REPORTED OUTCOME (PRO) QUESTIONNAIRES ........................................78 
 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 5 
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITION OF TERMS 
 
AE: 
adverse event 
AESI: 
adverse event of special interest 
ALP: 
alkaline phosphatase 
ALT: 
alanine aminotransferase 
ANCOVA: 
analysis of covariance 
APPADL: 
ability to perform physical activities of daily living 
AST: 
aspartate aminotransferases 
ATC: 
anatomic category 
BMI: 
body mass index 
BNP: 
brain natriuretic peptide 
CI: 
confidence interval 
CMH: 
Cochran-Mantel-Haenszel 
CSR: 
clinical study report 
DMC: 
Data Monitoring Committee 
ECG: 
electrocardiogram 
eCRF: 
electronic case report form 
FDA: 
Food and Drug Administration 
FPG: 
fasting plasma glucose 
FSH: 
follicle-stimulating hormone 
GGT: 
gamma-glutamyl transpeptidase 
HbA1c: 
glycosylated hemoglobin 
HDL: 
high-density lipoprotein 
HLGT: 
high level group term 
HLT: 
high level term 
HR: 
heart rate 
hs-CRP: 
high-sensitivity C-reactive protein 
IMP: 
investigational medicinal product 
IRT: 
interactive response technology 
IW-SP: 
Impact of Weight on self-perception 
KM: 
Kaplan-Meier 
LDL: 
low-density lipoprotein 
LLN: 
lower limit of normal 
LLT: 
lower level term 
MAR: 
Missing at random, Missing at random, Missing at random 
MedDRA: 
Medical Dictionary for Regulatory Activities 
NASH: 
nonalcoholic steatohepatitis 
NIMP: 
non-investigational medicinal product 
OC: 
observed cases 
PCSA: 
potentially clinically significant abnormality 
PD: 
pharmacodynamic 
PK: 
pharmacokinetic 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 6 
PPG: 
post-prandial plasma glucose 
PRO: 
patient-reported outcome 
PSAC: 
Pancreatic Safety Assessment Committee 
PT: 
preferred term 
SAE: 
serious adverse events 
SAP: 
statistical analysis plan 
SC: 
subcutaneous 
SD: 
standard deviation 
SE: 
standard error 
SMPG: 
self-monitored plasma glucose 
SOC: 
system organ class 
TEAE: 
treatment-emergent adverse event 
ULN: 
upper limit of normal 
VAS: 
visual analogue scale 
WHO-DD: 
World Health Organization-Drug Dictionary 
WRSM: 
weight-related symptoms measure 
 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 7 
1 
OVERVIEW AND INVESTIGATIONAL PLAN 
1.1 
STUDY DESIGN AND RANDOMIZATION 
This is a multicenter, multinational, randomized, placebo-controlled, 7-arm parallel-group 
Phase 2 study.  The study is double-blind with regard to SAR425899 and placebo treatments. It is 
open-label with regard to liraglutide comparative treatment.  The volume of investigational 
medicinal product (IMP; ie, dose of SAR425899 or matching placebo) is not blinded. 
Patients will be randomized into 1 of the 7 treatment arms: 
• 3 SAR425899 treatment arms receiving 3 dose levels (60 patients per arm). 
• 3 corresponding SAR425899 placebo treatment arms receiving 3 dose levels (10 patients 
per arm, 30 patients total). 
• 1 active comparator arm receiving 1.8 mg liraglutide (60 patients). 
For the biostatistical analyses, data from the 3 SAR425899 placebo arms will be pooled into 
1 placebo group. 
Patients will be stratified by screening visit HbA1c (<8% versus ≥8%) and Visit 4 (Day 1) body 
mass index (BMI: <35.0 kg/m2 versus ≥35.0 kg/m2). 
1.2 
OBJECTIVES 
1.2.1 Primary objectives 
The primary objective of this study is to assess the dose-response relationship of SAR425899 
versus placebo in terms of glycemic control as measured by the change in glycosylated 
hemoglobin (HbA1c) from baseline to Week 26. 
1.2.2 Secondary objectives 
Main secondary objectives: 
• To assess the effect of once daily dosing of SAR425899 on body weight over 26 weeks. 
• To assess the safety and immunogenicity profile of SAR425899 when administered as 
daily subcutaneous (SC) injections over 26 weeks, including assessment of the heart rate 
(HR) change from baseline to Week 26 by electrocardiogram (ECG) and Holter monitor. 
Additional secondary objectives: 
• To assess the proportion of patients achieving predefined HbA1c targets of <7% and 
<6.5% as well as the proportion of patients achieving ≥5% and ≥10% body weight loss at 
Week 26. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 8 
• To assess the effect of once daily dosing of SAR425899 on additional parameters of 
glycemic control and lipid metabolism. 
• To assess the effect of once daily dosing of SAR425899 on additional pharmacodynamic 
(PD) biomarkers. 
• To assess the pharmacokinetic (PK) profile and parameters of SAR425899,  
inter-individual and inter-occasion variability in PK parameters using a population PK 
approach. 
1.2.3 Exploratory objectives 
• To assess and compare the safety and efficacy of SAR425899 versus liraglutide from 
baseline to Week 26.   
• To explore SAR425899 PK/PD relationships for glycemic parameters, body weight loss 
and heart rate. 
• To assess the treatment effects in each group on patient-reported outcomes. 
• To assess the treatment effects in each group on nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH) and 
cardiovascular biomarkers. 
1.3 
DETERMINATION OF SAMPLE SIZE 
For the primary endpoint of change in HbA1c from baseline to Week 26, a sample size of 
60 patients per arm of SAR425899 and 30 patients in the placebo group (pool of the 3 placebo 
arms) will provide 80% power to detect a difference of 0.7% in the HbA1c change from baseline 
to Week 26 between a dose group of SAR425899 and placebo (standard deviation (SD) 1.1%; 
5% significance level 2-sided). 
The total sample size will be 270 patients to be randomized over 7 arms: 3 SAR425899 treatment 
arms with 3 different dose levels (60 patients per arm), 3 matching SAR425899 placebo treatment 
arms (10 patients per arm; 30 patients total), and 1 liraglutide arm (active comparator arm with 
60 patients).  
For the biostatistical analyses, data from the 3 SAR425899 placebo arms will be pooled into 
1 placebo group (30 patients total) 
Calculations were made using nQuery Advisor® 7.0. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan 
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 9 
1.4 
STUDY PLAN 
 
 
(electronic 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 10 
1.5 
MODIFICATIONS TO THE STATISTICAL SECTION OF THE PROTOCOL  
This section summarizes major changes to the protocol statistical section with emphasis on 
changes after study start (after the first patient was enrolled).   
The protocol history table below gives the timing, rationale, and key details of major changes to 
the protocol statistical section.  
The first patient was enrolled on Dec 23rd, 2016 under the original protocol. The amendment 1 
was finalized on Jan. 23rd, 2017. The body weight interim analysis is planned on Sept. 2017 and 
the interim analysis for PK/PD is planned on Dec. 2017. Note that the interim analysis for PK/PD 
was added on amendment 1. 
Table 1 - Protocol amendment statistical changes 
Amendment  
Number 
Date 
Approved 
Rationale 
Description of 
statistical changes 
1 
23-Jan-2017 
Increased urinary free-cortisol level was observed in animal 
studies of SAR425899 but the relevance of this finding to human is 
unclear. The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) requested to 
add the measurement of urinary free-cortisol and creatinine from 
24h urines at baseline and end of treatment in order to assess the 
increase in urinary free-cortisol in humans which may suggest a 
potential effect of SAR425899 on the hypothalamic-
pituitaryadrenal axis. 
To add urinary free-
cortisol and creatinine 
measured in 24 hours 
urines at baseline and in 
Visit 12 (Week 26, End 
of treatment). 
 
 
In phase I studies an increase of ketones bodies was observed for 
the SAR425899 high dose group (up to 0.18 mg) but not for 
placebo and the SAR425899 low dose group. In view of the 
currently requested administration of up to 0.20 mg of SAR425899 
and the potential gastrointestinal side effects together with the 
simultaneous administration of metformin, the BfArM 
recommended to consider metabolic acidosis as an adverse event 
of special interest with an immediate notification in order to 
recognize this state very early in the study and to discontinue the 
administration of metformin when applicable. 
To add metabolic 
acidosis as a new 
adverse event of special 
interest as requested by 
the BfArM. 
 
 
Leptin and microRNA were initially considered as biomarkers of 
interest in this study. Leptin plasma concentrations are correlated 
with fat mass. MicroRNA is a surrogate biomarker for nonalcoholic 
steatohepatitis (NASH). Thus assessment of these two biomarkers 
was expected to provide information about SAR425899 effect on 
fat mass and NASH. However the sponsor decided to not measure 
these parameters anymore during this phase II study. For Leptin, it 
is not required for any modeling and is not recommended as a 
surrogate to test for differences in energy expenditure. 
Nevertheless Leptin and fat mass changes are planned to be 
assessed in a study dedicated to energy expenditure assessment. 
For MicroRNA, patients included in this study are not diagnosed 
for NASH and no liver biopsy is taken which could make the 
interpretation of microRNA results difficult. Nevertheless microRNA 
is planned to be assessed in a study dedicated to NASH. 
To remove Leptin and 
microRNA assessments 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 11 
Amendment  
Number 
Date 
Approved 
Rationale 
Description of 
statistical changes 
1 
23-Jan-2017 
Potentially an interim analysis for population PK and PK/PD will be 
performed for 60% completers, in order to have data for internal 
project planning purposes. 
To add a potential 
interim analysis for 60% 
completers 
 
 
 
To add Amylase/lipase 
assessment in Visits 9 
and 11 as requested by 
the BfArM. 
 
 
To change the reference timepoint for blood sampling during the 
meal test from the end of the standardized meal to the start of the 
standardized meal and change the time period for the 
standardized meal consumption from 15 minutes to 10 minutes. 
Correction of a 
discrepancy between the 
text in Section 9.2.1.2.2 
and Table 2 regarding 
the reference time for 
blood sampling during 
the meal test. 
 
 
TSH, T3 and FT4 measurements will be performed at baseline and 
endpoints visits in order to assess further the thyroid function 
during the study. 
To Add thyroid function 
assessment at baseline 
and endpoint visits. 
 
1.6 
STATISTICAL MODIFICATIONS MADE IN THE STATISTICAL ANALYSIS PLAN 
The statistical analysis plan history table below gives the timing, rationale, and key details for 
major changes to the statistical analysis features in the statistical analysis plan. Changes also 
incorporated in a protocol amendment are cross-referenced to Table 1. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 12 
Table 2 - Statistical analysis plan statistical changes 
SAP 
version  
number 
Date 
approved
Rationale 
Description of statistical 
changes 
1 
This version 
Increased urinary free-cortisol level was observed in animal 
studies of SAR425899 but the relevance of this finding to 
human is unclear. The FDA requested to add the measurement 
of urinary free-cortisol and creatinine from 24h urines at 
baseline and end of treatment in order to assess the increase 
in urinary free-cortisol in humans which may suggest a 
potential effect of SAR425899 on the hypothalamic-
pituitaryadrenal axis. 
Urinary free-cortisol and 
creatinine measured in 24 hours 
urines, and the 
cortisor/creatinine ratio were 
added to the list of laboratory 
variables for statistical analyses. 
 
 
In phase I studies an increase of ketones bodies was observed 
for the SAR425899 high dose group (up to 0.18 mg) but not for 
placebo and the SAR425899 low dose group. In view of the 
currently requested administration of up to 0.20 mg of 
SAR425899 and the potential gastrointestinal side effects 
together with the simultaneous administration of metformin, the 
BfArM recommended to consider metabolic acidosis as an 
adverse event of special interest with an immediate notification 
in order to recognize this state very early in the study and to 
discontinue the administration of metformin when applicable. 
Metabolic acidosis was added to 
the list of AESI parameters for 
statistical analyses. 
 
 
Leptin and microRNA were initially considered as biomarkers of 
interest in this study. Leptin plasma concentrations are 
correlated with fat mass. MicroRNA is a surrogate biomarker 
for nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH). Thus assessment of 
these two biomarkers was expected to provide information 
about SAR425899 effect on fat mass and NASH. However the 
sponsor decided to not measure these parameters anymore 
during this phase II study. For Leptin, it is not required for any 
modeling and is not recommended as a surrogate to test for 
differences in energy expenditure. Nevertheless Leptin and fat 
mass changes are planned to be assessed in a study 
dedicated to energy expenditure assessment. For MicroRNA, 
patients included in this study are not diagnosed for NASH and 
no liver biopsy is taken which could make the interpretation of 
microRNA results difficult. Nevertheless microRNA is planned 
to be assessed in a study dedicated to NASH. 
Leptin and microRNA were 
removed from the list of 
pharmacodynamics biomarkers 
for statistical analyses. 
 
 
Potentially an interim analysis for population PK and PK/PD will 
be performed for 60% completers, in order to have data for 
internal project planning purposes. 
An interim PK/PD analysis will be 
performed for 60% completers. 
 
 
To add Amylase/lipase assessment in Visits 9 and 11 as 
requested by the BfArM. 
Visit 9 and 11 amylase/lipase 
assessments will be included in 
the analyses of amylase/lipase. 
 
 
To change the reference timepoint for blood sampling during 
the meal test from the end of the standardized meal to the start 
of the standardized meal and change the time period for the 
standardized meal consumption from 15 minutes to 10 
minutes. 
There will be no change to the 
planned by timepoint analyses 
on meal test related efficacy 
parameters due to the change, 
however, sensitivity analyses 
may be performed as necessary. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 13 
SAP 
version  
number 
Date 
approved
Rationale 
Description of statistical 
changes 
1 
This version 
To be consistent with company standard. 
The definition of treatment 
compliance was changed, with 
above-planned dosing defined 
as any day that the patient took 
a higher dose than planned, and  
under-planned dosing defined as 
any day that the patient took a 
lower dose than planned. 
1 
This version 
Trend tests on HbA1c will be performed instead pairwise 
comparison of each dose of SAR425899 versus placebo for 
primary analysis.  Same changes are also made for body 
weight analyses. The hierarchical testing procedure is also 
updated to reflect the changes. 
Trend tests on HbA1c will be 
performed instead pairwise 
comparison of each dose of 
SAR425899 versus placebo for 
primary analysis.  Same changes 
are also made for body weight 
analyses. The hierarchical 
testing procedure is also 
updated to reflect the changes. 
Details of the trend tests and 
hierarchical testing procedure 
are presented in Section 2.4.4. 
1 
This version 
Unblinded analyses results on body weight, HbA1c and FPG, 
and unblinded DMC results (including demographics, 
disposition, and safety summary) and additional related 
exploratory analyses will/may be provided to Sanofi internal 
project planning personnel to support compound development 
during the 2 interim analyses of the study. 
Unblinded analyses results on 
body weight, HbA1c and FPG, 
and unblinded DMC results 
(including demographics, 
disposition, and safety summary) 
and additional related 
exploratory analyses will/may be 
provided to Sanofi internal 
project planning personnel to 
support compound development 
during the 2 interim analyses of 
the study. Details are presented 
in Section 3. 
1 
This version 
To account for the situation that a patient took a 
SAR425899/placebo dose level that is different from the 
planned 4 doses levels allow for the study, specify that if a 
patient is exposed to more than one dose level of SAR425899 
since Week 8 visit or later, then the patient will be analyzed in 
the dose level administered on Week 8 visit or study Day 56 if 
Week 8 visit is not available. 
Patients will be analyzed for 
safety analyses according to the 
treatment actually received.  If a 
patient is exposed to more than 
one dose level of SAR425899 
since Week 8 visit or later, then 
the patient will be analyzed in 
the dose level administered on 
Week 8 visit or study Day 56 if 
Week 8 visit is not available.   
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 14 
2 
STATISTICAL AND ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES 
2.1 
ANALYSIS ENDPOINTS 
2.1.1 Demographic and baseline characteristics 
The baseline value is defined as the last available value before the first injection of   
investigational medicinal product (IMP) or the last available value on or before the date of 
randomization if not treated with IMP.  
Baseline safety and efficacy parameters are presented along with the summary statistics for safety 
and efficacy sections (Section 2.4.5 and Section 2.4.4). 
Demographic characteristics 
• Demographic characteristics to be summarized are: 
• Age (years) derived as: (Date of informed consent - Date of birth)/365.25; 
• Age categories (<50, ≥50 to <65, ≥65 to <75, ≥75 years of age); 
• Gender (Male, Female); 
• Race (American Indian or Alaska Native, Asian/Oriental, Black, Native Hawaiian or Other 
Pacific Islander, White, Other); 
• Ethnicity (Hispanic or Latino, Not Hispanic or Latino, Unknown); 
• Screening (V1) HbA1c (%); 
• Randomization strata (V1 screening) of HbA1c (<8%, ≥8%); 
• Baseline BMI (kg/m2) derived as: (Weight in kg)/(Height in meters)2; 
• Randomization strata of baseline BMI level (<35 kg/m2, ≥35 kg/m2); 
• Country. 
Disease characteristics at screening or baseline   
Disease history includes: 
• Duration of diabetes (years) derived as: (Date of informed consent – Date of diagnosis of 
diabetes + 1)/365.25; 
• Categorized duration of diabetes (years) (<10 years, ≥10 years) 
• Age at onset of diabetes (years) derived as: (Date of diagnosis of diabetes – Date of 
birth + 1)/365.25; 
• Anti-Hyperglycemic Therapy Categories (Metformin only, Diet/Exercise only, Metformin 
and diet/exercise) 
• Duration of metformin treatment (years) derived as: (Date of informed consent – Date of 
first dose of metformin + 1)/365.25; 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 15 
• Daily dose of metformin at baseline (mg) for patients taking metformin, defined as the last 
total daily value of metformin intake before the first dose injection of IP for those taking 
metformin at baseline; 
• Categorized daily dose of metformin at baseline (<1500, ≥1500 to <2500, ≥2500 to <3000, 
≥3000 mg); 
• Baseline diabetic microvascular complications (Yes, No) (ie, diabetic retinopathy, diabetic 
neuropathy, and diabetic nephropathy); 
• History of gestational diabetes (yes or no); 
• Baseline urine albumin/creatinine ratio categories (<30 µg/mg [Normal], ≥30 to 
<300 µg/mg [Microalbuminuria], and ≥300 µg/mg [Macroalbuminuria]); 
• Estimated Glomerular Filtration Rate (eGFR) at screening (ml/min); 
• eGFR categories at screening (<15 mL/min [End stage renal disease], ≥15 to <30 mL/min 
[Severe decrease in GFR], ≥30 to <60 mL/min [Moderate decrease in GFR], ≥60 to 
<90 mL/min [Mild decrease in GFR], and ≥90 mL/min [Normal]). 
Medical or surgical history  
Medical history and medical findings include: 
• Physical examination; 
• Medical or surgical history; 
• Alcohol habits; 
• Tobaco smoking habits. 
Medical and surgical history will be coded to a “lower level term (LLT)”, “preferred term (PT)”, 
“high level term (HLT)”, “high level group term (HLGT)”, and associated primary “system organ 
class (SOC)” using the version of Medical Dictionary for Regulatory Activities (MedDRA) 
currently in effect at Sanofi at the time of database lock. 
2.1.2 Prior or concomitant medications  
All medications taken within 3 months prior to the screening visit or during study are to be 
reported in the electronic case report form (eCRF) pages. 
All medications will be coded using the version of World Health Organization-Drug Dictionary 
(WHO-DD) currently in effect at Sanofi at the time of database lock. 
Medications will be classified into the following 3 groups: 
• Prior medications are those the patient took prior to the first injection of study IMP. Prior 
medications can be discontinued before first IMP injection or can be ongoing during 
treatment period. 
• Concomitant medications are those the patient continued or started on or after the 
first injection of study IMP up to 3 days after the last injection of study IMP.  
• Post-treatment medications are those the patient continued or started on or after 4 days 
after the last injection of study IMP.  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 16 
A given medication can be classified in several groups. 
Any technical details related to computation, dates, imputation for missing dates are described in 
Section 2.5. 
2.1.2.1 Concomitant diabetes therapy 
Patients can be enrolled with a background therapy metformin. Metformin should be administered 
according to its locally approved label and should be kept at stable dose throughout the study 
(same dose as used prior to the study) unless there is a specific safety issue related to this 
medication. 
2.1.2.2 Rescue therapy 
In case of fasting plasma glucose (FPG) or HbA1c above pre-defined thresholds and if no reasons 
can be found for insufficient glucose control, it is recommended to add rescue therapy. 
Central laboratory alerts on FPG and HbA1c are set up to ensure that glycemic parameters remain 
under predefined threshold values (see hereinafter).  
The threshold values are defined as follows, depending on study period: 
From baseline Visit 4 (Week 0) to Visit 9 (Week 8, including value at Visit 9): FPG >270 mg/dL 
(15.0 mmol/L). 
From Visit 9 (Week 8) to Visit 10 (Week 14): FPG > 240 mg/dL (13.3 mmol/L). 
From Visit 10 (Week 14) to Visit 12 (Week 26): FPG>200 mg/dL (11.1 mmol/L) or HbA1c >8%. 
In case of FPG / HbA1c above the threshold values, the investigator should ensure that no 
reasonable explanation exists for insufficient glucose control, and in particular that:  
• Plasma glucose was actually measured in fasting condition (ie, after at least 8 hrs fast). 
• Investigational product is given at planned dose. 
• There is no intercurrent disease, which may jeopardize glycemic control (eg, infectious 
disease). 
• Compliance with treatment is appropriate. 
• Compliance with diet and lifestyle is appropriate. 
If any of the above can reasonably explain the insufficient glycemic control, the investigator 
should undertake appropriate action, ie, 
• Dose increase of investigational product according to protocol (if tolerance allows). 
• Set up adequate investigation and treatment of intercurrent disease (to be reported in 
AE/concomitant medication parts of the eCRF). 
• Stress on the absolute need to be compliant with treatment. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 17 
• Organize a specific interview with a Registered Dietician or other qualified nutrition 
professional and stress on the absolute need to be compliant to diet and lifestyle 
recommendations, and check a FPG / HbA1c assessment at the next visit. 
If none from the above-mentioned reasons can be found, or if appropriate action fails to decrease 
FPG / HbA1c under the threshold values, rescue medication may be introduced. 
The choice of rescue therapy is at the investigator’s discretion with the exception of using GLP-1 
receptor agonists or DPP4 inhibitors. 
2.1.2.3 Prohibited concomitant therapy 
Use of the following medications will not be permitted during the study: 
• Weight control treatment, including any medication with a labelled reference to weight 
loss or weight gain.  
• Systemic glucocorticoid use for more than 7 days. 
• Any antidiabetic treatment other than IMP, authorized background antidiabetic therapy 
and rescue therapy, if necessary.   
• GLP-1 receptor agonists or dipeptidyl peptidase 4 (DPP4) inhibitors. 
• Drugs that affect gastrointestinal motility (eg, chronic use of anticholinergics, 
antispasmodics, 5HT3 antagonists, opiates). 
• Medications that may cause significant weight gain such as antipsychotic medications, 
tricyclic antidepressants, and mood stabilizers (eg, imipramine, amitryptiline, mirtazapine, 
paroxetine, phenelzine, chlorpromazine, thioridazine, clozapine, olanzapine, valproic acid 
and its derivatives, and lithium), and growth hormone. 
• Cannabis, even if prescribed for medical reasons. 
Any technical details related to computation, dates, imputation for missing dates are described in 
Section 2.5. 
2.1.3 Efficacy endpoints 
All biological efficacy assessments will be performed by a central laboratory. All scheduled 
measurements collected during the study will be used in the analysis, including those obtained 
after IMP discontinuation or rescue medication use. 
Efficacy variables will be summarized in both standard international units and conventional units 
when applicable. 
The baseline value for efficacy endpoints is the last available value prior to the first injection of 
IMP or the last available value on or before the date of randomization if not treated with IMP. 
HbA1c is assayed at screening (Visit 1); at Visit 4 (Day 1) before first IP injection; at Visit 6 
(Week 2); at Visit 8 (Week 4); at Visit 9 (Week 8); at Visit 10 (Week 14); at Visit 11 (Week 20); 
and at final assessment (Visit 12 at Week 26, primary endpoint assessment visit). 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 18 
Body weight is measured at screening (Visit 1); at Visit 4 (Day 1) before first IP injection; at 
Visit 6 (Week 2); at Visit 8 (Week 4); at Visit 9 (Week 8); at Visit 10 (Week 14); at Visit 11 
(Week 20); and at final assessment (Visit 12 at Week 26, primary endpoint assessment visit). 
FPG is measured at a central laboratory at screening (Visit 1); at Visit 4 (Day 1) before first IP 
injection; at Visit 6 (Week 2); at Visit 8 (Week 4); at Visit 9 (Week 8); at Visit 10 (Week 14); at 
Visit 11 (Week 20); and at final assessment (Visit 12 at Week 26, primary endpoint assessment 
visit). 
The self-monitored plasma glucose (SMPG) is measured over a single 24-hr period in the week 
before Visit 4 (Day 1) before first IP injection, Visit 10 (Week 14), and Visit 12 (Week 26, 
primary endpoint assessment visit). 
Fasting insulin are measured at Visit 4 (Day 1) before first IP injection; at Visit 10 (Week 14); and 
at final assessment (Visit 12 at Week 26, primary endpoint assessment visit). 
Following list of standardized meal test related measurements at premeal, 10 min, 20 min, 0.5 h, 
1 h, 1.5 h, 2 h, 3 h, 4 h post meal at Visit 3 (Week -1); and at final assessment (Visit 12 at 
Week 26, primary endpoint assessment visit) in up to 50% subset of all patients: 
• post-prandial plasma glucose (PPG) and associated glucose excursion 
• postprandial insulin, proinsulin and C-peptide and associated excursion values 
Pre-meal measurements of pro-insulin and C-peptide from the meal test will be used as fasting 
pro-insulin, and C-peptide values. 
The variables HOMA-IR (homeostasis model assessment for insulin resistance) index and 
HOMA-IR (homeostasis model assessment for β-cell function) index, derived from fasting 
plasma glucose and fasting plasma insulin (FPI), are calculated as: 
HOMA-IR index = [FPI (µU/mL) × FPG (mmol/L) / 22.5], 
HOMA-β index = ([20 × FPI (µU/mL)] / [FPG (mmol/L) - 3.5]). 
HOMA-IR and HOMA-IR will be derived at Visit 4 (Day 1) before first IP injection; at Visit 10 
(Week 14); and at final assessment (Visit 12 at Week 26, primary endpoint assessment visit). 
Fasting lipid profile (total cholesterol, triglycerides, LDL-C, and HDL-C) and free fatty acids will 
be assessed at screening, Visit 4 (Day 1) before first IP injection; at Visit 10 (Week 14); and at 
final assessment (Visit 12 at Week 26, primary endpoint assessment visit). 
Ketone bodies is assessed at Visit 4 (Day 1) before first IP injection; at Visit 8 (Week 4); at 
Visit 9 (Week 8); at Visit 10 (Week 14); at Visit 11 (Week 20); and at final assessment (Visit 12 
at Week 26, primary endpoint assessment visit). 
2.1.3.1 Primary efficacy endpoint(s) 
The primary efficacy endpoint is change in HbA1c (%) from baseline to Week 26. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 19 
2.1.3.2 Secondary efficacy endpoint(s) 
Continuous secondary efficacy endpoints 
The continuous secondary efficacy endpoints are: 
• Change in body weight from baseline to Week 26, 
• Change in FPG from baseline to Week 26, 
• Change in 7-point SMPG profiles from baseline to Week 26 (each time point and average 
daily value), 
• Change in PPG and in blood glucose excursion in response to a standardized meal test in 
up to 50% subset of all patients from baseline to Week 26 at time points premeal, 10 min, 
20 min, 0.5 h, 1 h, 1.5 h, 2 h, 3 h, 4 h post meal, 
• Change in fasting insulin, proinsulin, and C-peptide from baseline to Week 26, 
• Change in insulin, proinsulin, and C-peptide and associated excursion values in response 
to a standardized meal test in up to 50% subset of all patients from baseline to Week 26 at 
time points premeal, 10 min, 20 min, 0.5 h, 1 h, 1.5 h, 2 h, 3 h, 4 h post meal, 
• Change in HOMA-β and HOMA-IR from baseline to Week 26, 
• Change in lipid profile (total cholesterol, triglycerides, LDL-C, and HDL-C) and free fatty 
acids, and Ketone bodies from baseline to Week 26, 
For 7-point SMPG profiles, the mean daily (ie, average on 7 points) change from baseline to 
Week 26 will be analyzed. In addition, the change from baseline to Week 26 for each of the 
7 points will be evaluated, respectively. 
For FPG, only values assessed in fasting condition will be analyzed. 
Categorical secondary efficacy endpoints 
The categorical secondary efficacy endpoints are: 
• Percentage of patients reaching HbA1c <6.5% (49 mmol/mol) at Week 26, 
• Percentage of patients reaching HbA1c <7% (53 mmol/mol) at Week 26. 
• Percentage of patients achieving ≥5% body weight loss at Week 26, 
• Percentage of patients achieving ≥10% body weight loss at Week 26, 
• Percentage of patients requiring rescue therapy during the 26-week randomized treatment 
period. 
An algorithm for defining patients requiring rescue therapy is provided in Section 2.5.8. 
For further details on missing data handling, see Section 2.5.3. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 20 
2.1.4 Safety endpoints 
The safety endpoints are assessed by: 
• Adverse events (AEs), serious adverse events (SAEs), AE of special interest (AESIs), 
hypoglycemia (severe, documented, asymptomatic, probable, relative), vital signs, ECG 
changes, and safety laboratory values, 
• Change of heart rate from baseline to Week 26 by ECG, 
• Change of heart rate from baseline to Week 26 by Holter monitor in up to 50% subset of 
all patients, 
• Antibody assessments: anti-SAR425899 antibodies samples will be collected in all 
patients (except patients on Liraglutide) at baseline, Week 2, Week 4, Week 14, and 
Week 26 before dosing. Patients will be asked to provide sample for anti-SAR425899 
antibodies assessments 3 months after the end of the study if needed. 
Observation period  
The observation period will be divided into 4 epochs: 
• The screening epoch is defined as the time from the signed informed consent date up to 
the first administration of the IMP. 
• The treatment epoch is defined as the time from the first administration of the IMP to the 
last administration of the IMP 
• The residual treatment epoch is defined as the time from the last administration of the 
IMP up to 3 days (1 day for hypoglycemia, 28 days for anti-SAR425899 antibody) after 
the last administration of IMP. 
The treatment-emergent adverse event (TEAE) period will include both treatment and 
residual treatment epochs. 
• The posttreatment epoch is defined as the period of time starting the day after the end of 
the treatment-emergent adverse event period up to the end of the study (defined as last 
protocol-planned visit or the resolution/stabilization of all serious adverse events (SAE) 
and adverse events with prespecified monitoring as defined in protocol). 
The on-study observation period is defined as the time from the start of treatment until the end of 
study (defined as the last scheduled visit for those who completed the study and the date collected 
on e-CRF page “Completion of End of Study/Follow-up” for those who did not complete the 
study, or the resolution/stabilization of all serious adverse events and adverse events with 
prespecified monitoring as defined in the protocol whichever is the latest).  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 21 
2.1.4.1 Hypoglycemia 
Hypoglycemia will be identified as events recorded on the dedicated eCRF or eDiary 
“Hypoglycemic Event Information” page, and will be categorized as follows (see study protocol 
for further details): 
Severe hypoglycemia 
Severe hypoglycemia is an event requiring assistance of another person to actively administer 
carbohydrate, glucagon, or other resuscitative actions. These episodes may be associated with 
sufficient neuroglycopenia to induce seizure, unconsciousness, or coma. Plasma glucose 
measurements may not be available during such an event, but neurological recovery attributable to 
the restoration of plasma glucose to normal is considered sufficient evidence that the event was 
induced by a low plasma glucose concentration.  
The definition of severe hypoglycemia includes all episodes in which neurological impairment 
was severe enough to prevent self-treatment and which were thus thought to place patients at risk 
for injury to themselves or others. 
Note that “requires assistance” means that the patient could not help himself or herself. Assisting 
a patient out of kindness, when assistance is not required, should not be considered a “requires 
assistance” incident. 
Severe hypoglycemia will be qualified as an SAE only if it fulfills SAE criteria. All events of 
seizure, unconsciousness, or coma must be reported as SAEs. 
In the eCRF, severe hypoglycemia is identified based on information captured in the 
“Symptomatic hypoglycemic event information” page as those 
• ticked “Subject was Not Capable of Treating Self and Required Assistance” to the 
question “Countermeasure Administration” and 
• ticked “Yes” to the question “Were Symptoms Present”. 
Documented symptomatic hypoglycemia 
Documented symptomatic hypoglycemia is an event during which typical symptoms of 
hypoglycemia are accompanied by a measured plasma glucose concentration of ≤70 mg/dL 
(3.9 mmol/L). Clinical symptoms that are considered to result from a hypoglycemic episode can 
include (but are not limited to): increased sweating, nervousness, asthenia, tremor, dizziness, 
increased appetite, palpitations, headache, sleep disorder, confusion, seizures, unconsciousness, 
and coma.  
In the eCRF, documented symptomatic hypoglycemia is identified based on information captured 
in the “Symptomatic hypoglycemic event information” page as those 
• not ticked “Subject was Not Capable of Treating Self and Required Assistance” to the 
question “Countermeasure Administration” and 
• ticked “Yes” to the question “Were Symptoms Present” and 
• with a measured plasma glucose value before countermeasure  ≤70 mg/dL (3.9 mmol/L). 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 22 
Asymptomatic hypoglycemia 
Asymptomatic hypoglycemia: Asymptomatic hypoglycemia is an event not accompanied by 
typical symptoms of hypoglycemia but with a measured plasma glucose concentration less than or 
equal to 70 mg/dL (3.9 mmol/L). 
• not ticked “Subject was Not Capable of Treating Self and Required Assistance” to the 
question “Countermeasure Administration” and  
• ticked “No” to the question “Were Symptoms Present” and 
• with a measured plasma glucose value ≤70 mg/dL (3.9 mmol/L). 
Probable symptomatic hypoglycemia 
Probable symptomatic hypoglycemia is an event during which symptoms of hypoglycemia are not 
accompanied by a plasma glucose determination, but was presumably caused by a plasma glucose 
concentration less than or equal to 70 mg/dL (3.9 mmol/L); symptoms treated with oral 
carbohydrate without a test of plasma glucose.  
In the eCRF, probable symptomatic hypoglycemia is identified based on information captured in 
the “Symptomatic hypoglycemic event information” page as those  
• not ticked “Subject was Not Capable of Treating Self and Required Assistance” to the 
question “Countermeasure Administration” and  
• ticked “Yes” to the question “Were Symptoms Present” and 
• ticked “Yes” to the question “Was Any Countermeasure Given for the Hypoglycemic 
Event?” and  
• ticked “Yes” to the question “Did this countermeasure lead a significant improvement or 
prompt recovery?” and 
• with no plasma glucose value before countermeasure. 
Relative hypoglycemia 
Relative hypoglycemia: Relative hypoglycemia recently termed “pseudo-hypoglycemia” is an 
event during which the person with diabetes reports any of the typical symptoms of 
hypoglycemia, and interprets the symptoms as indicative of hypoglycemia, but with a measured 
plasma glucose concentration greater than 70 mg/dL (3.9 mmol/L), but approaching this level. 
• not ticked “Subject was Not Capable of Treating Self and Required Assistance” to the 
question “Countermeasure Administration” and  
• ticked “Yes” to the question “Were Symptoms Present” 
• with a measured plasma glucose value before countermeasure >70 mg/dL (3.9 mmol/L), 
Symptomatic hypoglycemia events fulfilling the criteria of a SAE will also be recorded on AE 
and SAE forms in eCRF. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 23 
2.1.4.2 Adverse events variables 
Adverse event observation period  
• Pre-treatment adverse events are AEs that developed or worsened or became serious 
during the pretreatment period. 
• Treatment-emergent adverse events are AEs that developed or worsened (according to the 
Investigator’s opinion) or became serious during the TEAE period. 
• Post-treatment adverse events are AEs that developed or worsened or became serious 
during the post-treatment period. 
All AEs (including SAEs and AEs with prespecified monitoring) will be coded to a lower-level 
term (LLT), preferred term (PT), high-level term (HLT), high-level group term (HLGT), and 
associated primary system organ class (SOC) using the version of Medical Dictionary for 
Regulatory Activities (MedDRA) currently in effect at Sanofi at the time of database lock. 
Record the occurrence of AEs (including SAEs and AEs with prespecified monitoring) from the 
time of signed informed consent until the end of the study. 
AESI include: 
• Pregnancy 
• Symptomatic overdose 
• Alanine aminotransferase (ALT) increase >3X upper limit of normal (ULN) (per related 
decision chart in Appendix C of protocol) 
• prolongation of QTc interval ≥500 ms (automatic measurement and confirmed by a 
manual reading by the Investigator or a physician delegated by the Investigator using the 
Fridericia formula for correcting QT) 
• sinus tachycardia (defined as confirmed sinus tachycardia [heart rate >100 bpm] in supine 
position reported at more than 2 visits) and associated with a concomitant increase, from 
baseline, in heart rate of ≥15 beats per minute 
• Severe allergic or allergic-like reaction (except local reactions at site of injection) 
• Calcitonin ≥20 pg/mL: events recorded on the AE form for increased calcitonin and its 
associated complementary form. 
• Amylase or lipase >2 x ULN 
• Metabolic acidosis 
Note that all AESI are identified by the corresponding AECAT variable in the AE raw dataset 
and/or other specific form as listed in the table below.   
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 24 
Table 3 - Summary of AESI reporting instructions 
Case Report Form completion 
Event 
category 
Reporting 
timeframe 
Specific events in this 
category 
AE 
form 
Safety  
Complementary 
Form 
Other 
specific 
forms 
Adverse Event of 
Special Interest  
Expedited  
(within 24 hours) 
Pregnancy 
Yes 
Yes 
Yes 
 
 
Symptomatic overdose 
Yes 
Yes 
Yes 
 
 
Increase in alanine transaminase 
(ALT) 
Yes 
Yes 
Yes 
 
 
Prolongation of QTc interval 
(automatic measurement) ≥500 ms 
Yes 
Yes 
No 
 
 
Persistence of sinus tachycardia per 
definition in Section 2.1.4.2 and 
associated with a concomitant 
increase, from baseline, in heart rate 
of ≥15 beats per minute   
Yes 
Yes 
No 
 
 
Severe allergic or allergic-like reaction 
(except local reactions at site of 
injection) 
Yes 
Yes 
Yes 
 
 
Calcitonin ≥20 pg/mL 
Yes 
Yes 
Yes 
 
 
Amylase/lipase>2xULN 
Yes 
Yes 
Yes 
 
 
Metabolic acidosis 
Yes 
Yes 
No 
Other AEs to be separately analyzed include: 
• Major cardiovascular events: events adjudicated as major cardiovascular events by CAC: 
- 
Death 
- 
MI/UA requiring hospitalization 
- 
Congestive heart failure requiring hospitalization 
- 
Coronary Revasularization 
- 
Arrhythmia 
- 
Stroke 
Adverse events sent for adjudication for major cardiovascular events will be identified by the 
corresponding AECAT variable in the AE raw dataset and/or other specific form and/or 
adjudication form. 
• Pancreatic events:  
- 
Pancreatitis adjudicated by the Pancreatic Safety Assessment Committee (PSAC) as: 
1) acute pancreatitis, 2) acute on chronic pancreatitis, 3) chronic pancreatitis, 4) 
unknown pancreatitis. 
- 
Pancreatic neoplasms adjudicated by the PSAC  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 25 
Adverse events sent for adjudication for pancretitis and/or Pancreatic neoplasms will be identified 
by the corresponding AECAT variable in the AE raw dataset and/or other specific form and/or 
adjudication form. 
• Local tolerability at injection site: identified by searching the term “injection site” in the 
PTs coded from the investigator reported terms. 
2.1.4.3 Deaths 
The deaths observation period are per the observation periods defined above.  
• Death on-study:  deaths occurring during the on-study observation period 
• Death on-treatment:  deaths occurring during the TEAE period  
• Death post-study:  deaths occurring after the end of the study  
2.1.4.4 Laboratory safety variables 
Clinical laboratory data consists of blood analysis (including hematology and clinical chemistry, 
amylase, lipase, calcitonin) and urinalysis (albumin/creatinine ratio).  Clinical laboratory values 
will be summarized in both standard international units and conventional units. 
The laboratory data will be collected at designated visits (see study flowchart in Appendix C.  The 
following laboratory data will be measured at a central laboratory and used as safety endpoints: 
• Hematology 
- 
Red blood cells, platelets: hemoglobin, hematocrit, red blood cells (erythrocytes) 
count, platelets count. 
- 
White blood cells: white blood cells count, and differential counts (neutrophils, 
lymphocytes, monocytes, basophils, and eosinophils). 
• Clinical chemistry 
- 
Electrolytes: sodium, potassium, calcium, phosphorus. 
- 
Renal function: creatinine, calculated eGFR, cystatin C, uric acid. 
- 
Liver function: alanine aminotransferases (ALT), aspartate aminotransferases (AST), 
alkaline phosphatase (ALP), gamma-glutamyl transpeptidase (GGT), total bilirubin 
(and, in case of values above the normal range, differentiation in conjugated and non-
conjugated bilirubin). 
• Thyroid panel: Thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH), Total Triiodothyronine (T3) and Free 
Thyroxine (FT4). 
• Pancreatic enzymes: lipase, amylase. 
• Serum calcitonin. 
• Urine analysis: albumin/creatinine ratio. 
• Urinary free-cortisol and creatinine based on 24-hour urine sample in some patients, 24-hr 
free-cortisol/creatinine ratio will be derived for these patients. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 26 
Lipid parameters (fasting): total cholesterol, triglycerides, LDL-C, and HDL-C are presented as 
efficacy parameters in Section 2.1.3.2. 
Other laboratory data not mentioned above (serology tests (hepatitis B antigen, hepatitis C 
antibodies), serum pregnancy test, serum follicle-stimulating hormone [FSH], and estradiol) will 
not be defined as safety endpoints (collected as per study flowchart in Appendix C). 
Technical formulas are described in Section 2.5.1. 
2.1.4.5 Vital signs variables 
Vital signs include supine heart rate (bpm) and sitting systolic and diastolic blood pressures 
(mmHg). 
2.1.4.6 Physical examination 
A exam will be performed at Visit 1 (Screening), Visit 4 (baseline), Visit 9 (Week 8), Visit 10 
(Week 14), and at final assessment (Visit 12 at Week 26, primary endpoint assessment visit). 
“Normal”, “Abnormal” or “Not done” as determined by the Investigator will be reported in the 
eCRF. Any abnormality related to physical examination will be reported in the eCRF “Adverse 
Event” page or “Medical History” page. 
2.1.4.7 Electrocardiogram variables 
Standard 12-lead ECGs are recorded at Week -3, 0 (Day 1), 4, Visit 10 (Week 14), and on 
Visit 12 (Week 26, primary endpoint assessment visit). A single 12-lead ECG printout with heart 
rate, PR, QRS, QT, QTc automatic correction evaluation (by the ECG device) will be generated. 
ECG status of “normal” or “abnormal” will be reported in the eCRF as determined by the 
Investigator. 
2.1.4.8 Holter Monitoring 
Holter ECG will be collected on Visit 3 (Week -1), on Visit 10 (Week 14), and on Visit 12 
(Week 26, primary endpoint assessment visit). The Holter monitor will be proposed to first up to 
50% of patient who agree.  Twenty–four hour average and night time average heart rate will be 
derived based on the holter monitoring. Twenty-four hour interval is defined to be from the time 
of dosing until 24 hours post dose.  Night time is defined to be the interval from 12 hours post 
dose until 24 hours post dose. For Visit 3, time of dosing is expected time of dosing on Day 1. 
2.1.4.9 Anti-SAR425899 antibody assessment 
Anti-SAR425899 antibody status (Positive, Negative), antibody levels (titer or conecentration) 
will be collected on the safety population and only in patients from SAR treatment groups. 
The TEAE period for antibody variables is defined in Section 2.1.4. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 27 
2.1.5 Pharmacokinetic variables  
Pharmacokinetics variables include plasma concentrations of patients in the SAR425899 groups. 
2.1.6 Pharmacodynamic biomarkers, NASH and cardiovascular biomarkers  
Pharmacodynamic biomarkers are: 
• Change waist circumference, hip circumference, waist to hip ratio from baseline to 
Week 26, 
• Change in visual analogue scale (VAS) for appetite/satiety score in response to a 
standardized meal test in up to 50% subset of all patients from baseline to Week 26 at time 
points premeal, 4 hours post meal, 
• Change in fasting level of adiponectin from baseline to Week 26. 
Waist circumference, hip circumference, waist to hip ratio are assessed at Visit 4 (Day 1) before 
first IP injection; at Visit 10 (Week 14); and at final assessment (Visit 12 at Week 26, primary 
endpoint assessment visit). 
VAS for appetite/satiety score will be measured at premeal and 4 hours post meal at Visit 3  
(Week -1); and at final assessment (Visit 12 at Week 26, primary endpoint assessment visit) in up 
to 50% subset of all patients 
Fasting level of adiponectin will be assessed at Visit 4 (Day 1) before first IP injection; at Visit 10 
(Week 14); and at final assessment (Visit 12 at Week 26, primary endpoint assessment visit).  
2.1.7 NASH and cardiovascular biomarkers  
• Change in NASH biomarkers from baseline to Week 26: α2-macroglobulin, apolipoprotein 
A1, haptoglobin, CK18, GGT, ALT and AST. 
• Change in Cardiovascular biomarkers from baseline to Week 26: high-sensitivity  
C-reactive protein (hs-CRP), brain natriuretic peptide (BNP). 
2.1.8 Patient reported outcomes 
The patient-reported outcome (PRO) questionnaires in this study are the Weight-Related 
Symptoms Measure (WRSM), the Ability to Perform Physical Activities of Daily Living 
(APPADL, initially called the Impact of Weight on Activities of Daily Living) and the Impact of 
Weight on self-perception (IW-SP).  The questionnaires are attached in the Appendix E. 
The 3 PRO questionnaires will be administered at baseline and Week 26.  The patients will be 
requested to complete the questionnaires by themselves during selected clinical visits in specific 
booklets, independently from investigator, site staff and any help from friends or relatives.  For 
validity purposes, patients will be asked to answer all the questions of the questionnaires at the 
start of the visit in a quiet place, before any procedures/tests and before discussing with the 
investigator, and while on site to return the completed questionnaires to the investigator or his/her 
designee on the same day. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 28 
In case of early IMP discontinuation, the questionnaires will be administered at the visit planned 
for the last dosing day with IMP and afterwards as normally planned. 
The WRSM is a validated PRO questionnaire to measure the presence and bothersomeness of 
obesity symptoms (1).  It was developed with and for obese and overweight adults.  It includes 
20 items on shortness of breath, tiredness, sleep problems, sensitivity to cold, increased thirst, 
increased irritability, back pain, frequent urination, pain in the joints, water retention, foot 
problems, sensitivity to heat, snoring, increased appetite, leakage of urine, lightheadedness, 
increased sweating, loss of sexual desire, decreased physical stamina, and skin irritation.  The 
presence of each symptom is first asked to patient (Yes/No) and then the bothersomeness of 
symptom is evaluated on a 7-point Likert scale (from 0 [not at all] to 6 [a very great deal 
bothersomeness]).  A total score is calculated by summing the bothersomeness for each symptom, 
ranging from 0 to 120, with lower scores corresponding to less bothersomeness.  The completion 
time of the WRSM is less than 5 minutes.  It demonstrated robust psychometric properties in 
obese and overweight people including its responsiveness to weight decrease. 
APPADL: 
The APPADL, previously named the Impact of Weight on Activities of Daily Living (IW-ADL) 
is a validated PRO questionnaire to measure the ability of moderately obese individuals with 
T2DM to perform daily physical activities (2).  It was developed with T2DM individuals with 
BMI between 25 and 40 kg/m².  It includes 7 items on flexibility, mobility, and activity level, 
evaluated on a 5-point Likert scale (from 1 [unable to do] to 5 [not at all difficult]).  A total score 
is calculated by summing the 7 items and dividing by the number of items, it ranges from 1 to 5, 
with higher scores corresponding to greater ability to do physical daily activities.  The completion 
time of the APPADL is estimated to be less than 5 minutes.  It demonstrated robust psychometric 
properties in patients with T2DM and BMI >30 kg/m² and was able to discriminate patients who 
achieved at least 5% weight loss from others who did not (3). 
A raw total APPADL score is calculated by summing the 7 item scores and dividing by the 
number of items (7). The raw APPADL total score ranges from 1 to 5. To transform the APPADL 
total score to a scale ranging from 0 to 100, the following transformation formula is used: 
[(actual raw score – lowest possible score)/raw score range (highest possible score – lowest 
possiblescore)] x 100. 
 
For example, using the transformation formula, a raw APPADL total score of “3.0” becomes a 
transformed total score of “50.0” on a scale of 0 to 100: 
[(3.0-1.0)/(5-1)] *100 = 2/4 *100 = 50.0 
 
Higher raw APPADL raw total scores and higher transformed APPADL total scores correspond to 
better self-reported ability to perform physical activities of daily living. 
Missing data imputation for APPADL can be found in Section 2.5.9. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 29 
IW-SP: 
The IW-SP is a validated questionnaire to assess an individual’s self-perception related to his or 
her weight.  It was developed with moderately obese individuals with T2DM (BMI 25 to 
40 kg/m²) (4).  It includes 3 items on unhappiness with appearance, self-consciousness in social 
situations, and overall self-perception, evaluated on a 5-point Likert scale (from 1 [always] to 
5 [never]).  A total score is calculated by summing the 3 items and dividing by the number of 
items, it ranges from 1 to 5, with higher scores corresponding to better self-perception.  The 
completion time of the IW-SP is estimated to be less than 2 minutes.  It demonstrated robust 
psychometric properties in patients with T2DM and BMI >30 kg/m² and was able to discriminate 
patients who achieved at least 5% weight loss from others who did not. 
A raw total IW-SP score is calculated by summing the 3 item scores and dividing by the number 
of items (3). The raw IW-SP total score ranges from 1 to 5. To transform the IW-SP total score to 
a scale ranging from 0 to 100, the same transformation formula as APPADL is used. For example, 
using the formula, a raw IW-SP total score of “2.0” becomes a transformed total score of “25.0” 
on a scale of 0 to 100: 
[(2.0-1.0)/5-1] *100 = 1/4 *100 = 25.0 
Higher raw IW-SP total scores and higher transformed IW-SP total scores correspond to better 
self-perception. 
Missing data imputation for IW-SP can be found in Section 2.5.9. 
Patient qualitative assessment of the treatment 
In addition of the 3 PRO questionnaires, patients will be asked to answer questions at the end of 
the treatment period (Week 26).  This patient qualitative assessment of treatment aims to better 
understand patients’ views on benefits and disadvantages of the treatment they experienced during 
the trial.  The two first questions will ask patients to describe in free text the benefits and 
disadvantages of the drug they experienced during the trial.  A third question will ask patients if 
they would be willing to pursue the treatment they had during the trial (yes/no) and to describe the 
reasons in free text.  Finally, patients will be asked to give their perception of the drug benefit-risk 
on 7-point Likert scale ranging from -3 (disadvantages significantly outweigh the benefits) to 
3 (Benefits significantly outweigh the disadvantages) and where 0 corresponds to ‘Equal benefits 
and disadvantages’. This patient qualitative assessment should take between 10 and 20 minutes.  
Patients’ answers to the 3 first questions will be analyzed qualitatively. Due to the availability of 
this questionnaire only in English, it will be limited to English speakers in United States and 
Canada only. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 30 
2.2 
DISPOSITION OF PATIENTS 
This section describes patient disposition for both patient study status and the patient analysis 
populations. 
Screened patients are defined as all patients who have signed the informed consent. 
Randomized patients consist of all patients who have signed informed consent, with a treatment 
kit number allocated and recorded in the interactive response technology (IRT) database, 
regardless of whether the treatment kit was actually used or not. 
For patient study status, the total number of patients in each of the following categories will be 
presented in the clinical study report (CSR), using a flowchart diagram or summary table: 
• Screened patients 
• Screen failure patients and reasons for screen failure 
• Nonrandomized but treated patients 
• Randomized patients 
• Randomized but not treated patients 
• Randomized and treated patients 
• Patients included in each of the substudy (meal test and holter monitor) 
• Patients who have completed the 26-week treatment period as per protocol 
• Patients who permanently discontinued the IMP, the main reason for treatment 
discontinuation, and subject’s request for treatment discontinuation 
• Patients who complete the study as per protocol 
• Patients who did not complete the study as per protocol and the reasons for study 
discontinuation 
• Patients’ end of study status (completed, not completed) by end of treatment status 
(completed, not completed) 
• Status at last study contact. 
For the screened, screen failure, and non-randomized but treated patients, percentages will be 
calculated using the number of screened patients as the denominator. All other categories of 
patients will be presented by treatment group, and percentages will be calculated using the 
number of randomized patients within each treatment group as the denominator. Reason for 
treatment/study discontinuation will be provided in tables giving numbers and percentages by 
treatment group. 
A summary of the distribution of patients by country and center will also be provided (overall 
number of patients screened, screened but not randomized, randomized, and randomized but not 
treated, and number of patients randomized and discontinued from study treatment for each 
treatment group). 
Patients treated but not randomized, randomized but not treated, patients randomized but not 
treated as randomized will be identified and described in separate listings. Patients of the second 
category (randomized and not treated) will be part of efficacy analyses. Patients of the third 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 31 
category (randomized and not treated as randomized) will be part of efficacy and safety analyses 
(see Section 2.3). Safety data of patients treated but not randomized will be reported separately. 
The randomization strata [HbA1c at screening (<8%, ≥8%) and Visit 4 (Day 1) BMI 
(<35.0 kg/m2, ≥35.0 kg/m2)] assigned by IRT will be summarized. The percentages will be 
calculated using the number of randomized patients as the denominator. The discrepancy between 
the strata assigned by IRT and the information reported on eCRF will be listed for all randomized 
patients. 
Kaplan-Meier (KM) plots of the cumulative incidence of IMP discontinuation due to any reason 
or due to AE will be provided for the 26-week treatment period. Additionally, a listing of these 
patients, along with the reason for treatment discontinuation, study completion status and the 
reason for study discontinuation, will be provided. Time to treatment discontinuation will be 
defined as the number of days from the first injection of IMP until the day of treatment 
discontinuation. All completers will be considered as censored observations. The censoring time 
will be the number of days from the first injection of IMP until the last injection date during  
26-week treatment period.  
All major or critical deviations including deviations related to randomization procedure will be 
listed and summarized in tables giving numbers and percentages of deviations by randomized 
treatment group. 
Additionally, the analysis populations for efficacy, safety, PK, and each of the substudy defined in 
Section 2.3 will be summarized in a table by number of patients on the randomized population: 
• Efficacy population: modified intent-to-treat (ITT) population, 
• Safety population. 
• PK population. 
• Substudies 
2.2.1 Major deviations related to randomization procedure 
Major deviations related to randomization procedure occur whenever: 
1. A randomization is not in accordance with the protocol-defined randomization method, 
such as a) an ineligible patient is randomized, b) a patient is randomized based on an 
incorrect stratum, c) a patient is randomized twice, or d) in a dynamic randomization 
scheme the treatment assignment is, in fact, not random, due to a computer program error.  
 
OR 
2. A patient is dispensed an IMP kit not allocated by the protocol-defined randomization, 
such as a) a patient at any time in the study is dispensed a different treatment kit than as 
randomized (which may or may not contain the correct-as-randomized IMP), or b) a 
nonrandomized patient is treated with IMP reserved for randomized patients. 
Major deviations related to randomization procedure will be monitored throughout the study and 
reviewed on an ongoing basis.  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 32 
All major deviations related to randomization procedure will be documented in the CSR. The 
deviations will be categorized and summarized among randomized patients (number and 
percentages).  Nonrandomized, treated patients will be described separately. 
2.3 
ANALYSIS POPULATIONS 
Patients treated without being randomized (patients who received   IMP without calling the IRT or 
before calling the IRT, or patients who did not give their informed consent) will not be considered 
as randomized. They will be excluded from any population for analysis, including efficacy and 
safety. However, if these patients experience any safety event, they will be presented and listed 
separately in the appendix of the CSR. 
The randomized population includes any patient who has been allocated to a randomized 
treatment regardless of whether the treatment kit was used. 
For any patient randomized more than once, only the data associated with the first randomization 
will be used in any analysis population.  The safety experience associated with any later 
randomization will be assessed separately. 
2.3.1 Efficacy populations 
Efficacy analyses will be based on the ITT population, defined as all randomized patients, 
irrespective of compliance with the study protocol and procedures. Efficacy analyses will be 
based on the treatment group allocated by the IRT according to the randomization schedule at 
randomization visit (as randomized), irrespective of the treatment actually received. 
2.3.2 Safety population 
Safety analyses will be based on the safety population, defined as all randomized patients who 
receive at least 1 dose of IMP (regardless of the amount of treatment administered). Patients will 
be analyzed for safety analyses according to the treatment actually received.  For a patient 
randomized to a SAR425899 treatment arm, the patient will be analyzed in the treatment he/she 
receives starting Week 8 visit (inclusive) when no adjustment of dose level is allowed. However, 
for a patient randomized to a SAR425899 treatment arm and discontinues the IMP before Week 8 
visit, the patient will be analyzed in the SAR425899 treatment arm the patient is randomized to. If 
a patient is exposed to more than one dose level of SAR425899 since Week 8 visit or later, then 
the patient will be analyzed in the dose level administered on Week 8 visit or study day 56 if 
Week 8 visit is not available. If a patient is treated with both placebo and SAR425899 any time 
during the study, the patient will be analyzed in the SAR425899 treatment arm.  Liraglutide 
patients will be included in the Liraglutide treatment arm regardless of dose amount patients 
receive. 
In addition:  
• Nonrandomized but treated patients will not be part of the safety population; however, 
their safety data will be presented separately; 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 33 
• Randomized patients for whom it is unclear whether they took the IMP will be included in 
the safety population as randomized; 
• Patients will be excluded from the safety population only if there is documented evidence 
(ie, all study dates recorded as no medication taken) that patients have not taken the study 
medication. 
2.3.3 Pharmacokinetic population  
For PK analyses, the PK population is defined as all randomized and treated patients who 
contribute with at least 1 valid plasma concentration of SAR425899. The PK data will be 
analyzed according to the treatment actually received (see Section 2.3.2). 
2.3.4 Pharmacodynamic population  
The analysis of pharmacodynamics biomarkers will be conducted on the ITT population. The data 
will be analyzed according to the treatment as randomized (see Section 2.3.1). 
2.3.5 NASH and cardiovascular biomarkers population  
The analysis of NASH and cardiovascular biomarkers will be conducted on the ITT population. 
The data will be analyzed according to the treatment as randomized (see Section 2.3.1). 
2.3.6 Patient-reported outcome population 
The analysis of PROs will be conducted on the ITT population. The PROs data will be analyzed 
according to the treatment as randomized (see Section 2.3.1). 
2.3.7 Substudy population 
Patients included in a substudy (meal test, or holter monitor substudy) are defined as patients who 
signed the informed consent for the substudy, and have at least one post baseline measurement for 
any of the substudy variables. 
Meal test related variables are: 
• PPG and in blood glucose excursion in response to a standardized meal test in up to 50% 
subset of all patients from baseline to Week 26 at time points premeal, 10min, 20min, 
0.5h, 1h, 1.5h, 2h, 3h, 4h post meal, 
• Insulin, proinsulin, and C-peptide and associated excursion values in response to a 
standardized meal test in up to 50% subset of all patients from baseline to Week 26 at time 
points premeal, 10min, 20min, 0.5h, 1h, 1.5h, 2h, 3h, 4h post meal, 
• VAS for appetite/satiety score in response to a standardized meal test in up to 50% subset 
of all patients from baseline to Week 26 at time points premeal, 4 hours post meal. 
Holter monitor related variables are  
• Twenty–four hour average heart rate, 
• Night time average heart rate. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 34 
2.4 
STATISTICAL METHODS 
2.4.1 Demographics and baseline characteristics 
Continuous data will be summarized by treatment group using the number of available 
observations (N), mean, standard deviation (SD), minimum, median, and maximum. Categorical 
and ordinal data will be summarized using counts and percentages in each treatment group. 
Parameters will be summarized based on the randomized population analyzed in the treatment 
group to which they were randomized.  Analyses for the safety population will be included in the 
appendices if the size of the safety population is different (>10%) from the size of that in the 
primary analysis population (ie, randomized patients) for any treatment group. 
Parameters described in Section 2.1.1 will be summarized by treatment group and overall (pooled 
across treatment groups) using descriptive statistics.  
P-values on the treatment difference for the demographic and baseline characteristic data will not 
be calculated.  
In general, no specific description of the safety parameters will be provided at baseline.  If 
relevant, the baseline values will be described along with each safety analysis. 
In general, no specific description of the efficacy parameters will be provided at baseline.  If 
relevant, the baseline values will be described along with each efficacy analysis. 
2.4.2 Prior or concomitant medications  
The prior, concomitant and posttreatment medications will be presented in the randomized 
population for each treatment group (and overall for the summary of prior medications), using 
counts and percentages. No statistical test for the between-group difference will be performed. 
Medications will be summarized by treatment group according to the WHO-DD dictionary, 
considering the first digit of the anatomic category (ATC) class (anatomic category) and the 
first 3 digits of the ATC class (therapeutic category).  A given medication may be classified in 
more than 1 ATC class. All ATC codes corresponding to a medication will be summarized, and a 
patient will be counted once in each ATC category (anatomic or therapeutic) linked to the 
medication. Therefore a patient may be counted several times for the same medication.  
Prior medications will be presented by anatomic and therapeutic categories and sorted by 
decreasing frequency of ATC based on the overall incidence across treatment groups.  In case of 
equal frequency regarding ATCs (anatomic or therapeutic categories), alphabetical order will be 
used. 
Concomitant and posttreatment medications will be presented by anatomic and therapeutic 
categories and sorted by decreasing frequency of ATC based on the incidence in the SAR425899 
0.20 mg dose group. In case of equal frequency regarding ATCs (anatomic or therapeutic 
categories), alphabetical order will be used. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 35 
2.4.3 Extent of investigational medicinal product exposure and compliance  
The extent of IMP exposure and compliance will be assessed and summarized by actual treatment 
received within the safety population (Section 2.3.2). 
2.4.3.1 Extent of investigational medicinal product exposure 
The extent of IMP exposure will be assessed by the duration of IMP exposure. 
The duration of IMP exposure is defined as last dose date of double-blind IMP – first dose date of 
double-blind IMP + 1 day, regardless of unplanned intermittent discontinuations (see  
Section 2.5.3 for calculation in case of missing or incomplete data). 
Duration of IMP exposure (days) will be summarized descriptively as a quantitative variable 
(number of patients exposed, mean, SD, minimum, median, and maximum). In addition, duration 
of treatment exposure will also be summarized categorically by numbers and percentages for each 
of the following categories and cumulatively according to these categories: 
• 1 to 14 days, 
• 15 to 28 days, 
• 29 to 56 days, 
• 57 to 98 days, 
• 99 to 182 days, 
• >182 days. 
Additionally, the cumulative duration of treatment exposure will be provided, defined as the sum 
of the duration of treatment exposure for all patients, and will be expressed in patient years. 
2.4.3.2 Compliance  
A given administration will be considered noncompliant if the patient did not take the planned 
dose of treatment as required by the protocol. No imputation will be made for patients with 
missing or incomplete data.  
Percentage of compliance for a patient will be defined as the number of days that the patient was 
compliant divided by the total number of days that the patient was planned to take during the 
treatment epoch defined in Section 2.1.4 (ie, from the first date to the last date of double-blind 
IMP administration).  
Above-planned dosing percentage for a patient will be defined as the number of days that the 
patient took a higher dose than planned divided by the total number of days that the patient was 
planned to take during the treatment epoch.  
Under-planned dosing percentage for a patient will be defined as the number of days that the 
patient took a lower dose than planned divided by the total number of days that the patient was 
planned to take during the treatment epoch. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 36 
Treatment compliance, above-planned, and under-planned dosing percentages will be summarized 
descriptively as quantitative variables (number, mean, SD, median, minimum, and maximum). 
The percentage of patients whose compliance is <80% will be summarized. In addition, numbers 
and percentages of patients with at least 1 above-planned dose administration will be provided, as 
well as numbers and percentages of patients with 0, (0, 20%], and >20% under-planned dose 
administrations. 
The planned dose is defined to be the intended dose as collected in the eCRF.  
Cases of overdose (see study protocol for further details) will constitute AEs and be analyzed as 
such. More generally, dosing irregularities related to randomization procedure will be listed in 
Section 2.2.1. 
2.4.4 Analyses of efficacy endpoints 
Efficacy analyses will be performed on the ITT population using efficacy assessment collected 
during the study, including those obtained after IMP discontinuation or introduction of rescue 
therapy, unless otherwise specified. 
Unscheduled post-baseline measurements will be allocated to a post-baseline visit according to 
the criteria described in Section 2.5.4 
2.4.4.1 Analysis of primary efficacy endpoint(s) 
The statistical test will be 2-sided tests at a nominal 5% significance level. 
Primary analysis 
The primary efficacy endpoint of change in HbA1c from baseline to Week 26 will be analyzed 
with missing post-baseline values imputed by placebo control-based multiple imputation (MI) 
method under the missing not at random framework (5, 6, 7). 
• 
For placebo group patients, missing data will be imputed based on the placebo group data. 
• 
For patients in the SAR425899 dose groups and liraglutide group, missing data will be 
imputed as if the patients were on placebo group throughout the study. 
For missing HbA1c value at baseline, missing data will be imputed using MI under the missing at 
random (MAR) assumption. Missing data at baseline will be imputed using regression method 
that includes randomization stratum of screening HbA1c (≤8.0%, >8.0%), randomization stratum 
of Visit 4 (Day 1) BMI (<35.0 kg/m2, ≥35.0 kg/m2), and baseline value in the imputation model 
(see sample code Part 1c in Appendix D). 
The change from baseline at Week 26 values will be derived from observed or imputed Week 26 
HbA1c values (see sample code Part 1a in Appendix D). Each of the complete dataset will be 
analyzed by the Analysis of Covariance (ANCOVA) model with treatment groups (SAR425899 
0.12 mg, SAR425899 0.16 mg, SAR425899 0.20 mg, placebo and liraglutide), randomization 
strata of screening HbA1c value (<8, ≥8%), randomization strata of Visit 4 (Day 1) BMI 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 37 
(<35.0 kg/m2, ≥35.0 kg/m2), and country as fixed effects, and baseline HbA1c value as a 
covariate(see sample code Part 2 in Appendix D).  
Results from each complete dataset will be combined using Rubin’s rule to provide the following.  
Three trend tests are planned on HbA1c. First trend test will be performed to test the hypothesis 
that HbA1c reduction from baseline at Week 26 increases with increase in dose. The test will be 
based on a contrast under the ANCOVA framework and with coefficients of +3, +1, -1, -3 and 0 
for SAR425899 0.20 mg, SAR425899 0.16  mg, SAR425899 0.12 mg, placebo and liraglutide, 
respectively.  The second trend test (SAR425899 0.16 mg versus placebo) is performed with 
coefficients of 0, +1, 0, -1 and 0 for SAR425899 0.20 mg, SAR425899 0.16 mg, SAR425899 
0.12 mg, placebo and liraglutide, respectively.  The third trend test (SAR425899 0.12 mg versus 
placebo) is performed with coefficients of 0, 0, 1, -1 and 0 for SAR425899 0.20 mg, SAR425899 
0.16 mg, SAR425899 0.12 mg, placebo and liraglutide, respectively. Adjusted mean change in 
HbA1c from baseline to Week 26 for each treatment group, as well as the between-group 
difference (comparing each SAR425899 dose group versus placebo) and the 95% confidence 
interval (CI) for the between-group difference will also be provided. The overall Type 1 error for 
multiple comparisons of the HbA1c and body weight will be controlled by a Hierarchical testing 
procedure as detailed in Section 2.4.4.3. 
The ANCOVA model will be implemented using statistical analysis system (SAS®) (Version 9.4 
or higher) MIXED procedure (PROC MIXED). 
Sensitivity analyses 
Tipping point analysis based on the control-based MI method will be performed to examine the 
robustness of the results from the primary analysis (7). Patients who were randomized to 
SAR425899 dosing groups and liraglutide group and had no value at Week 26 will be given a 
penalty of 0.2%, ie, they are assumed to have received a treatment inferior to placebo by 0.2%. 
The penalty will be gradually increased by 0.2% at a time to evaluate at which level the 
conclusion of the analyses in terms of statistical significance is changed for the first trend test. 
The tipping point is the penalty level, at which the magnitude of efficacy reduction in patients 
without HbA1c value at Week 26 creates a shift in the treatment effect of each of SAR425899 
dose group so that the trend test result becomes insignificant. The steps to perform the tipping 
point analysis are as follows: 
1. Missing data will be imputed using control-based MI (see sample code Part 1b in 
Appendix D), 
2. All imputed Week 26 HbA1c values in the SAR425899 dose groups and Liraglutide group 
will be penalized  by adding 0.2% in each complete dataset (see sample code Part 1b in 
Appendix D), 
3. Change from baseline at Week 26 in HbA1c will be analyzed using the same ANCOVA 
model as specified in the primary analysis in each complete dataset (see sample code 
Part 2 in Appendix D), 
4. Results will be combined across complete datasets using Rubin’s rule (see sample code 
Part 3 in Appendix D), 
5. Steps 2 to 5 will be repeated with penalty increased by 0.2% until the p-value for the first 
trend test is >0.05. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 38 
Summary statistics at scheduled visits 
Summary statistics (for screening value, baseline value, observed values, and observed changes 
from baseline) at scheduled visits (using OC) will be provided for each treatment group. The 
summary will include the number of observations, mean, SD, standard error (SE), minimum, 
median, and maximum. Graphical presentations will also be used to examine trends over time 
using mean values (±SE) and mean changes from baseline (±SE) at each of the scheduled visits. 
These analyses will be performed using efficacy assessments obtained during the 26-week 
treatment period, including those obtained after IMP discontinuation or introduction of rescue 
therapy.  
2.4.4.2 Analyses of secondary efficacy endpoints 
Descriptive statistics (number, mean, standard deviation, median, minimum, and maximum) will 
be provided by treatment for all continuous secondary variables at the scheduled visits. 
All continuous secondary efficacy endpoints at Week 26 defined in Section 2.1.3.2 will be 
analyzed using the same ANCOVA model with missing post baseline values imputed by placebo 
control-based MI method as described in Section 2.4.4.1 to compare each SAR425899 dose group 
with placebo. For missing value at baseline, missing data will be imputed using the same MI 
under the MAR assumption as described in Section 2.4.4.1. The model will include fixed effect 
terms of treatment groups (SAR425899 0.12 mg, SAR425899 0.16 mg, SAR425899 0.20 mg, 
placebo and liraglutide), randomization strata of screening HbA1c value (<8, ≥8%), 
randomization strata of Visit 4 (Day 1) BMI (<35.0 kg/m2, ≥35.0 kg/m2), and country, and the 
covariate of baseline value. The three trend tests described in Section 2.4.4.1 are planned on body 
weight only.  For all continuous secondary efficacy endpoints, means and adjusted means of each 
treatment group will be provided, as well as adjusted mean and associated two-sided 95% CI of 
the differences between each SAR425899 dose group and placebo. The analyses include values at 
baseline and Week 26 (observed or imputed) regardless of treatment discontinuation or initiation 
of rescue therapy. 
All categorical secondary efficacy endpoints defined in Section 2.1.3.2 will be analyzed using a 
Cochran-Mantel-Haenszel (CMH) method stratified on randomization strata of screening HbA1c 
value (<8, ≥8%) and randomization strata of Visit 4 (Day 1) BMI(<35.0 kg/m2, ≥35.0 kg/m2). The 
proportion in each treatment group will be provided, as well as the difference of proportions 
between each SAR425899 dose group and placebo with associated 2-sided 95% CI. For HbA1c 
(<6.5%, <7% respectively at Week 26) and body weight (≥5%, ≥10% body weight loss 
respectively from baseline at Week 26) responders, all values at Week 26 will be used to 
determine whether a patient is a responder or not, even if they are measured after IMP 
discontinuation or rescue medication use. Patients who have no measurement at Week 26 will be 
treated as non-responders. 
For percentage of patients requiring rescue therapy, patients who have received rescue therapy 
during the 26-week treatment period will be summarized.  
For HbA1c and body weight responders, a sensitivity analysis will be performed treating patients 
as non-responders if they receive rescue therapy, or have no measurement at Week 26. The 
sensitivity analysis includes measurement at Week 26, regardless of treatment discontinuation. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 39 
2.4.4.3 Multiplicity issues 
To control the type I error, a hierarchical testing procedure will be applied.  The testing procedure 
will be performed to test the primary and secondary efficacy variables (HbA1c and body weight) 
by the following prioritized order. The test stop as soon as an endpoint is found not statistically 
significant at α=0.05 (2-sided). 
Figure 1 - The hierarchical testing procedure 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
First trend test for HbA1c 
P<0.05 
Stop 
no
P<0.05 
Stop 
no
yes 
Third trend test for HbA1c 
P<0.05 
Stop 
no
yes 
yes 
Third trend test for body weight 
Second trend test for body weight 
1 
4 
5 
6 
P<0.05 
Stop
First trend test for body weight 
no
2
Second trend test for HbA1c 
P<0.05 
Stop
no
3 
yes 
yes
 
No multiplicity adjustment will be made on other secondary efficacy variables other than body 
weight. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 40 
2.4.5 Analyses of safety data 
The summary of safety results will be presented by treatment group.  
The “observation period” defined in Section 2.1.4 is applicable in all safety analyses for the 
classification of AEs, potentially clinically significant abnormality (PCSA) values for the 
laboratory, vital sign, ECG and Holtor monitoring. 
General common rules 
All safety analyses will be performed on the safety population as defined in Section 2.3.2, unless 
otherwise specified, using the following common rules: 
• Safety data in patients who do not belong to the safety population (eg, exposed but not 
randomized) will be listed separately; 
• The baseline value is defined as the last available value before the first injection of IMP.  
• The PCSA values are defined as abnormal values considered medically important by the 
Sponsor according to predefined criteria/thresholds based on literature review and defined 
by the Sponsor for clinical laboratory tests, vital signs, and ECG (PCSA version dated 
May 2014 [Appendix A]).  
• PCSA criteria will determine which patients had at least 1 PCSA during the TEAE period, 
taking into account all evaluations performed during the TEAE period, including 
unscheduled or repeated evaluations. The number of all such patients will be the 
numerator for the treatment-emergent PCSA percentage; 
• The treatment-emergent PCSA denominator by group for a given parameter will be based 
on the number of patients assessed for that given parameter during the TEAE period by 
treatment group in the safety population;  
• For laboratory parameters cited in the protocol as efficacy endpoints (including HbA1c 
and plasma glucose), PCSA summaries will not be provided. These parameters will be 
summarized in Section 2.4.4; 
• For quantitative safety parameters based on central laboratory/reading measurements, 
descriptive statistics will be used to summarize results and change from baseline values by 
visit and treatment group.  Summaries will include the last on-treatment value 
(see Section 2.4.5.4); 
• The analysis of the safety variables will be essentially descriptive and no systematic 
testing is planned. Relative risks versus placebo and their 95% CIs may be provided, if 
relevant; 
• Selected safety analyses will be summarized by age group (<50, ≥50 to <65, ≥65 to <75, 
≥75 years of age), gender, race subgroups, and any pertinent subgroups as appropriate(see 
details in Section 2.4.5.1 and Section 2.4.5.2). 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 41 
2.4.5.1 Analyses of hypoglycemia 
Analyses of hypoglycemia will be performed on the TEAE period, as defined in Section 2.1.4. 
Hypoglycemia will be classified as severe hypoglycemia, documented symptomatic 
hypoglycemia, asymptomatic hypoglycemia, probable symptomatic hypoglycemia or relative 
hypoglycemia (see Section 2.1.4.1). 
The number (%) of patients with any hypoglycemia, severe hypoglycemia and documented 
symptomatic hypoglycemia will be summarized respectively by treatment group for the TEAE 
period, as well as the incidence rate in patient years. Two types of incidence rates will be 
presented: the number of patients with at least 1 event per patient years (calculated as the number 
of patients with at least 1 event / total exposure in patient years), and the number of events per 
patient years (calculated as the number of events / total exposure in patient years). Note: here 
exposure is duration of TEAE period, ie, duration of IMP treatment in days +1 (see Section 2.1.4).  
The summary of frequency and incidence rate in patient years for severe hypoglycemia or 
documented symptomatic hypoglycemia will be provided as appropriate by gender (Male, 
Female), age group (<50, ≥50 to <65, ≥65 to <75, ≥75 years of age), race (American Indian or 
Alaska Native, Asian/Oriental, Black, Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific Islander, White, Other). 
The summary of frequency and incidence rate in patient years for severe hypoglycemia or 
documented symptomatic hypoglycemia will be provided as appropriate by anti-SAR425899 
antibody status (Positive, Negative) during TEAE period. A patient is defined as anti- 
SAR425899 antibody positive during the TEAE period if the patient is anti- SAR425899 antibody 
positive at any time during TEAE period, ie, duration of IMP treatment in days +28 
(see Section 2.1.4).  
A KM curve will also be provided by treatment group for the time to first onset of severe or 
documented symptomatic hypoglycemia during the TEAE period.  
A listing of patients for all hypoglycemic events reported on the dedicated eDiary or eCRF 
“Hypoglycemic Event Information” form will be provided with each category flagged (ie, severe 
hypoglycemia, documented symptomatic hypoglycemia, asymptomatic hypoglycemia, probable 
symptomatic hypoglycemia and relative hypoglycemia). 
2.4.5.2 Analyses of adverse events 
Generalities 
The primary focus of AE reporting will be on treatment-emergent adverse events (TEAEs).   
Pre- and post-treatment AEs will be described separately.  
If an AE date/time of onset (occurrence, worsening, or becoming serious) is incomplete, an 
imputation algorithm will be used to classify the AE as pre-treatment, treatment-emergent, or 
post-treatment.  The algorithm for imputing date/time of onset will be conservative and will 
classify an AE as treatment-emergent unless there is definitive information to determine it is  
pre- or post-treatment. Details on classification of AEs with missing or partial onset dates are 
provided in Section 2.5.3. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 42 
Adverse event incidence tables will be presented by SOC, HLGT, HLT, and PT, sorted by the 
internationally agreed order for SOCs and alphabetic order for HLGT, HLT and PT within a SOC, 
the number (n) and percentage (%) of patients experiencing an adverse event.  Multiple 
occurrences of the same event in the same patient will be counted only once in the tables within a 
treatment phase.  The denominator for computation of percentages is the safety population within 
each treatment group. 
Sorting within tables ensures the same presentation for the set of all adverse events within the 
observation period (pretreatment, treatment-emergent, and posttreatment).  For that purpose, the 
table of all treatment-emergent adverse events presented by primary SOC and PT (sorted by the 
internationally agreed SOC order and decreasing frequency of PTs within SOCs in the 
SAR425899 0.20 mg group) will define the presentation order for all other similar tables unless 
otherwise specified. In case of equal frequency regarding PTs, alphabetical order will be used. 
Analysis of all treatment-emergent adverse events 
The following TEAE summaries will be generated for the safety population. 
• Overview of TEAEs, summarizing number (%) of patients with any: 
- 
TEAE, 
- 
Serious TEAE, 
- 
TEAE leading to death, 
- 
TEAE leading to permanent treatment discontinuation; 
• All TEAEs by primary SOC, showing number (%) of patients with at least 1 TEAE, sorted 
by internationally agreed order of primary SOCs;  
• All TEAEs by PT, showing number (%) of patients with at least 1 TEAE, sorted by 
decreasing incidence of PT in the SAR425899 0.20 mg group; 
• All TEAEs by primary SOC, HLGT, HLT and PT, showing number (%) of patients with at 
least 1 TEAE, sorted by internationally agreed SOC order. The other levels (HLGT, HLT, 
PT) will be presented in alphabetic order; 
• All TEAEs by primary SOC and PT, showing number (%) of patients with at least 
1 TEAE, sorted by internationally agreed SOC order and decreasing incidence of PTs 
within a SOC in the SAR425899 0.20 mg group. This sorting order will be applied to all 
other similar tables, unless otherwise specified; 
• Common TEAEs (PTs with an incidence ≥3% in any treatment group) by primary SOC, 
HLGT, HLT, and PT, sorted by internationally agreed order of SOCs. The other levels 
(HLGT, HLT, PT) will be presented in alphabetic order; 
• All TEAEs regardless of relationship and related to IMP by primary SOC, HLGT, HLT, 
and PT, showing number (%) of patients with at least 1 TEAE, sorted by internationally 
agreed order of SOCs. The other levels (HLGT, HLT, PT) will be presented in alphabetic 
order; 
• All TEAEs by maximal severity, presented by primary SOC and PT, showing number (%) 
of patients with at least 1 TEAE by severity (ie, mild, moderate, or severe), sorted by 
sorting order defined above; 
• Kaplan-Meier curves will be provided, when appropriate, for the time to first onset of the 
following PTs: nausea and vomiting; 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 43 
• Summaries of common TEAEs (PTs with an incidence ≥3% in any treatment group) will 
be provided as appropriate by primary SOC, HLGT, HLT, and PT and by demographic 
factors including gender (Male, Female), age group (<50, ≥50 to <65, ≥65 to <75, 
≥75 years of age), and race (American Indian or Alaska Native, Asian/Oriental, Black, 
Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific Islander, White, Other). SOC will be sorted by 
internationally agreed order and the other levels (HLGT, HLT, PT) in alphabetic order. 
• Summaries of common TEAEs (PTs with an incidence ≥3% in any treatment group) will 
be provided as appropriate for SAR425899 treatment groups by primary SOC, HLGT, 
HLT, and PT and by anti- SAR425899 antibody status (Positive, Negative) during the 
TEAE period as necessary. SOC will be sorted by internationally agreed order and the 
other levels (HLGT, HLT, PT) in alphabetic order. 
Analysis of all treatment emergent serious adverse event(s) 
• All treatment-emergent SAEs by primary SOC, HLGT, HLT, and PT, showing the number 
(%) of patients with at least 1 treatment-emergent SAE, sorted by the internationally 
agreed SOC order.  The other levels (HLGT, HLT, PT) will be presented in alphabetical 
order. 
• All treatment-emergent SAEs regardless of relationship and related to IMP, by primary 
SOC, HLGT, HLT, and PT, showing the number (%) of patients with at least 
1 treatment-emergent SAEs, sorted by the internationally agreed SOC order.  The other 
levels (HLGT, HLT, PT) will be presented in alphabetical order. 
Analysis of all treatment-emergent adverse event(s) leading to treatment discontinuation 
• All TEAEs leading to treatment discontinuation, by primary SOC, HLGT, HLT, and PT, 
showing the number (%) of patients with at least 1 TEAE leading to treatment 
discontinuation, sorted by the internationally agreed SOC order.  The other levels (HLGT, 
HLT, PT) will be presented in alphabetical order. 
Analysis of AESI  
The number (%) of patients with specific AESIs will be summarized by category (as identified in 
Section 2.1.4.2) and PT, and sorted by decreasing incidence in the SAR425899 0.20 mg group. 
All AESI events reported by the Investigators will be listed. 
Analysis of pancreatic events 
• Pancreatitis 
- 
The number (%) of patients with events positively adjudicated as pancreatitis by the 
PSAC will be summarized by type: 1) acute pancreatitis, 2) acute on chronic 
pancreatitis, 3) chronic pancreatitis, 4) unknown pancreatitis.  
- 
All events sent to PSAC for adjudication for pancreatitis will be listed along with the 
adjudication outcome. 
• Pancreatic neoplasm  
- 
All the events sent to PSAC for adjudication for pancreatic neoplasm will be listed 
along with the adjudication outcome including PSAC diagnosis, type of neoplasm 
(malignant, benign), cancer stage etc. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 44 
Analysis of major cardiovascular events  
The number (%) of patients with events adjudicated as major cardiovascular events by CAC will 
be summarized by treatment group.  All events reported by the Investigators on the AE forms for 
cardiovascular events and the associated complementary forms (confirmed or not confirmed by 
CAC) will be listed along with the adjudication outcome.  
Local tolerability at injection site  
Adverse events related to local intolerability at the injection site will be identified by searching 
the term “injection site” in the PTs coded from the Investigator reported terms.  The number (%) 
of patients with related events will be summarized by treatment group, and sorted by decreasing 
incidence in the SAR425899 0.20 mg group. 
All adverse events related to local intolerability at the injection site will be listed. 
Analysis of pre-treatment and post-treatment adverse events  
• All pre-treatment AEs by primary SOC and PT, showing the number (%) of patients with 
at least 1 pre-treatment AE, sorted by the internationally agreed SOC order and decreasing 
incidence of PTs within each SOC in the SAR425899 0.20 mg group. 
• All post-treatment AEs by primary SOC and PT, showing the number (%) of patients with 
at least 1 post-treatment AE, sorted by the internationally agreed SOC order and 
decreasing incidence of PTs within each SOC in the SAR425899 0.20 mg group. 
Listings 
Supportive AE listings will be provided as appropriate for all AEs, SAEs and AEs leading to 
treatment discontinuation, TEAE leading to death, AESI, pancreatic events, major cardiovascular 
events, and adverse events related to local intolerability at the injection site. These listings will 
include at least the following information, sorted by treatment, patient identification, and onset 
date: treatment, patient identification, country, age, gender, race, BMI, primary SOC, PT, reported 
term, onset date, study day (relative day to the start date of   treatment), AE duration, duration of 
exposure, intensity, corrective treatment, action taken with IMP, date of treatment discontinuation 
(if relevant), relationship to IMP/NIMP/study procedures, outcome, date of death (if any), 
seriousness, seriousness criteria, and AE status (“Pre” for a pre-treatment AE; “T” for a TEAE; 
and “Post” for a post-treatment AE). 
2.4.5.3 Deaths 
The following summaries of deaths will be generated for the safety population. 
• Number (%) of patients who died by study period (on-study, on-treatment, post-study)  
• Deaths in nonrandomized patients or randomized but not treated patients 
• TEAEs leading to death (death as an outcome on the eCRF AE page as reported by the 
investigator) by primary SOC, HLGT, HLT, and PT, showing number (%) of patients, 
sorted by internationally agreed order of SOC and alphabetic order of HLGT, HLT, and 
PT. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 45 
2.4.5.4 Analyses of laboratory variables  
Laboratory parameters will be grouped and summarized by biological function as described in 
Section 2.1.4.4.  
The summary statistics (including number, mean, median, Q1, Q3, standard deviation, minimum 
and maximum) of all laboratory variables (central laboratory values and changes from baseline) 
will be calculated for each applicable visit or study assessment (screening, baseline, postbaseline 
time points, last on-treatment value) by treatment group.  
The incidence of PCSAs (list provided in Appendix A) at any time during the treatment-emergent 
adverse event period will be summarized by biological function and treatment group whatever the 
baseline level and/or according to the following baseline status categories: 
• Normal/Missing, 
• Abnormal according to PCSA criterion or criteria. 
For calcitonin and the albumin/creatinine ratio, no PCSA criterion is defined. Similar summaries 
using the pre-defined categories will be provided for the TEAE period. The pre-defined categories 
are, for calcitonin ≤ULN, >ULN - 20 ng/L, ≥20 - <50 ng/L, and ≥50 ng/L (Note that ng/L is the 
standard international unit and is equivalent to pg/mL); and for albumin/creatinine ratio 
<30 µg/mg creatinine [Normal], ≥30 to <300 µg/mg creatinine [Microalbuminuria], and 
≥300 µg/mg creatinine [Macroalbuminuria].  
For parameters for which no PCSA criteria are defined, similar table(s) using the normal range 
will be provided. 
All measurements collected during the TEAE period, including values from unscheduled visits, 
will be considered for the PCSA summaries. These summaries will include patients in the safety 
population who have at least 1 assessment performed during the TEAE period. When a PCSA 
definition involves a change from baseline value, patients must also have a baseline value to be 
included in the summaries, and when required by the definition of the abnormality, patients must 
also have available laboratory normal ranges. 
A listing of patients with at least 1 post-baseline PCSA (or out of normal range when no PCSA 
criterion is defined) will be provided and will display the entire patients’ profile across time for all 
parameters belonging to the corresponding biological function. Individual data listings will 
include flags when applicable: 
• Baseline values will be flagged “B”. 
• Normal laboratory ranges, available for most laboratory parameters, will be identified as 
ULN and LLN. Baseline, last on-treatment value, and individual data will be flagged “L” 
if the value is below the LLN and will be flagged “H” if it is above the ULN. 
• Laboratory PCSA criteria will be used for the corresponding laboratory parameters. 
Values reaching a PCSA limit will be flagged (+, ++, -, or -- depending upon the direction 
and level of the abnormality). Flags for WBC and differential counts will be determined 
using data expressed in international units. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 46 
For parameters whose PCSA criteria are multiples of the ULN, the parameter’s value will also be 
expressed as a multiple of the ULN in the individual data provided. 
Drug-induced liver injury 
The liver function tests, namely AST, ALT, ALP, and total bilirubin, are used to assess possible 
drug-induced liver toxicity.  The proportion of patients with PCSA values at any post-baseline 
visit by baseline status will be displayed by treatment group for each parameter.  The proportion 
of patients with PCSA values at any post-baseline visit will also be displayed by duration of 
exposure for each treatment group (only if a tabulation summary is necessary). 
Listing of possible Hy’s law cases identified by treatment group (eg, patients with any elevated 
ALT>3 x ULN, and associated with an increase in bilirubin >2 x ULN) with ALT, AST, alkaline 
phosphatase, total bilirubin, and the following complementary parameters (if available):  
conjugated bilirubin and prothrombin time/international normalized ratio, creatine phosphokinase, 
serum creatinine, complete blood count, anti-HAV IgM, anti-HBc IgM, anti-HCV and 
HCV RNA, anti-CMV IgM and anti-HEV IgM antibodies, auto-antibodies: anti-nuclear, 
anti-DNA, anti-smooth muscle, Epstein-Barr virus, herpes viruses, and anti-LKM. 
2.4.5.5 Analyses of vital sign variables 
The summary statistics (including number, mean, median, Q1, Q3, standard deviation, minimum 
and maximum) of all vital signs variables (HR, SBP, DBP and changes from baseline) will be 
calculated for each visit or study assessment (baseline, each postbaseline time point, last on-
treatment and/or worst on-treatment value and/or other specific assessment) by treatment group.  
For parameters HR, SBP, and DBP, mean changes from baseline with the corresponding standard 
error will be plotted over time (at same time points) in each treatment group. 
The incidence of PCSAs at any time during the treatment-emergent adverse event period will be 
summarized by treatment group irrespective of the baseline level and/or according to the 
following baseline status categories:  
• Normal/missing 
• Abnormal according to PCSA criterion or criteria 
The summaries will include patients in the safety population who have at least 1 assessment 
performed during the TEAE period. When a PCSA definition involves a change from baseline 
value, patients must also have a baseline value to be included in the summaries. 
A listing of patients with at least 1 post-baseline PCSA will be provided and will display the 
patient’s profile over time of all vital sign parameters. Individual data listings will include the 
following flags: 
• Baseline values will be flagged “B”, 
• Parameter values reaching a PCSA limit will be flagged (+, or - depending of the 
direction). 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 47 
2.4.5.6 Analyses of 12 lead electrocardiogram variables 
The summary statistics (including number, mean, median, Q1, Q3, standard deviation, minimum 
and maximum) of all 12 lead ECG variables (HR, PR, QRS, QT, QTc and changes from baseline) 
will be calculated for each applicable visit or study assessment (screening, baseline, postbaseline 
time points, last on-treatment value) by treatment group. For parameters HR, PR, QRS, QT, QTc 
mean changes from baseline with the corresponding standard error will be plotted over time (at 
same time points) in each treatment group. 
The incidence of PCSAs at any time during the treatment-emergent adverse event period will be 
summarized by treatment group irrespective of the baseline level and/or according to the 
following baseline status categories:  
• Normal/missing 
• Abnormal according to PCSA criterion or criteria 
The summaries will include patients in the safety population who have at least 1 assessment 
performed during the TEAE period. When a PCSA definition involves a change from baseline 
value, patients must also have a baseline value to be included in the summaries. 
A listing of patients with at least 1 post-baseline PCSA will be provided and will display the 
patient’s profile over time of all vital sign parameters. Individual data listings will include the 
following flags: 
• Baseline values will be flagged “B”, 
• Parameter values reaching a PCSA limit will be flagged (+, ++, -, or -- depending of the 
direction and level of the abnormality).   
A listing of subjects with at least one abnormality in qualitative assessment (ie, abnormal ECG) 
during the TEAE will be also provided. 
2.4.5.7 24-hours Holter ECG 
The summary statistics (including number, mean, median, Q1, Q3, standard deviation, minimum 
and maximum) of all Holter ECG variables (24-hour average and night time average heart rate, 
and changes from baseline) will be calculated for each applicable visit or study assessment 
(screening, baseline, postbaseline time points, last on-treatment value) by treatment group. For 
parameters 24-hour average and night time average heart rate, mean changes from baseline with 
the corresponding standard error will be plotted over time (at same time points) in each treatment 
group. 
2.4.5.8 Analyses of anti-drug antibody variables 
Analyses of antibody variables will be performed on the safety population (only in patients from 
SAR treatment groups). 
The number and percentage of patients by antibody status will be listed and summarized by visit, 
as well as the percentage of conversion from negative to positive status from baseline to Week 26.  
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 48 
Antibody levels (titer or concentration) will be listed and summarized by visit using descriptive 
statistics by N, geometric mean, coefficient of variation, median, minimum and maximum.  
2.4.6 Analyses of pharmacokinetic variables 
SAR425899 plasma concentrations of patients in the SAR425899 treatment groups will be listed 
and summarized by visit and time window and by antibody status in the PK population, using 
descriptive statistics by N, geometric mean, coefficient of variation, median, minimum and 
maximum. 
Population PK modeling and simulation results would be provided in a separate report. 
2.4.7 Analyses of pharmacodynamics biomarkers 
Descriptive statistics (number, mean, standard deviation, median, minimum, and maximum) will 
be provided by treatment for pharmacodynamics biomarkers at the scheduled visits. 
2.4.8 Analyses of NASH and cadiovascular biomarkers 
Descriptive statistics (number, mean, standard deviation, median, minimum, and maximum) will 
be provided by treatment for NASH and cadiovascular biomarkers at the scheduled visits.  GGT, 
ALT, and AST will be analyzed according to Section 2.4.5.4, no additional analyses will be 
provided. 
2.4.9 Analyses of patient reported outcomes (health-related quality of life/health 
economics variables) 
2.4.9.1 Analysis of PRO questionnaires (WRSM, APPADL and IW-SP) 
Descriptive statistics (number, mean, standard deviation, median, minimum, and maximum) will 
be provided by treatment for PRO questionnaires (WRSM, APPDL and IW-SP) at the scheduled 
visits. 
PRO questionnaires (WRSM, APPDL and IW-SP) at Week 26 will be analyzed using the same 
ANCOVA model with missing post baseline values imputed by placebo control-based MI method 
as described in Section 2.4.4.1 to compare each SAR425899 dose group with placebo. For 
missing value at baseline, missing data will be imputed using the same MI under the MAR 
assumption as described in Section 2.4.4.1. The model will include fixed effect terms of treatment 
groups (SAR425899 0.12 mg, SAR425899 0.16 mg, SAR425899 0.20 mg, placebo and 
liraglutide), randomization strata of screening HbA1c value (<8, ≥8%), randomization strata of 
Visit 4 (Day 1) BMI (<35.0 kg/m2, ≥35.0 kg/m2), and country, and the covariate of baseline value. 
Means and adjusted means of each treatment group will be provided, as well as adjusted mean and 
associated two-sided 95% CI of the differences between each SAR425899 dose group and 
placebo. The analyses include values at baseline and Week 26 (observed or imputed) regardless of 
treatment discontinuation or initiation of rescue therapy. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 49 
2.4.9.2 Analysis of the patient qualitative assessment of the treatment 
Patients’ answers to the 3 open-ended questions will be analyzed qualitatively using qualitative 
data analysis software. This qualitative thematic analysis of patients answers will be based on 
grounded theory methods and involve creating codes corresponding to concepts and sub-concepts 
identified in the text. A global synthesis will establish the most relevant concepts reported by the 
patients (benefits, disadvantages and reasons to continue or not the drug). Additional descriptive 
statistics will be provided on the closed-ended questions. The analyses method for this exploratory 
analysis will be provided in a separate SAP and the analyses results will be documented in a 
separate report. 
2.5 
DATA HANDLING CONVENTIONS 
2.5.1 General conventions 
The following formulas will be used for computation of parameters. 
Renal function formulas  
The estimated glomerular filtration rate (GFR) will be calculated by 4 variable MDRD formula 
using the serum creatinine, race, age, and gender of the patient: 
Standard unit: eGFR (mL/min/1.73 m2) = 175 x [Serum Creatinine (µmol/L)/88.4] -1.154 x Age 
(year) -0.203 x 1.212 (if Black) x 0.742 (if female) 
Conventional unit: GFR (mL/min/1.73 m2) = 175 x serum creatinine (mg/dL) -1.154 x age (yr) -0.203 
x 1.212 [if black] x0.742 [if female] 
Urine albumin/creatinine ratio: 
Standard unit: Urine albumin/creatinine ratio (mg/g) = Urine Albumin (mg/dL) / [Urine 
Creatinine (mmol/L) x 11.31] x 1000 
Conventional unit: Urine albumin/creatinine ratio (mg/g) = Urine Albumin (mg/dL) / Urine 
Creatinine (mg/dL)  x 1000 
Calculation of LDL-C 
When triglycerides is lower than or equal to 4.52 mmol/L (400 mg/dL), LDL-C is calculated 
using the Friedewald equation as: 
Standard unit (mmol/L): total cholesterol – HDL-C – triglycerides/2.17; 
Conventional unit (mg/dL): total cholesterol – HDL-C – triglyceride /5. 
When triglycerides is greater than 4.52 mmol/L (400 mg/dL), the Friedewald equation can not be 
used to derive LDL-C value, and the value of LDL-C will be considered as missing. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 50 
Linked adverse events that worsened or became serious 
An AE that worsened or became serious will have a separate record in the data from the original 
event record with an AE identification number that links the new record to the original record. An 
AE that worsened or became serious will be considered a new recurring AE in the summary of 
recurrent events or in the summary of events by time intervals. 
2.5.2 Data handling conventions for secondary efficacy variables 
All continuous secondary efficacy endpoints at Week 26 will be analyzed using an ANCOVA 
model as described in Section 2.4.4.2. The analyses include all observed values at baseline and 
Week 26 regardless of treatment discontinuation or initiation of rescue therapy.  Missing values 
will be imputed by control-based multiple imputation method under the missing not at random 
frame work.  
For the categorical secondary efficacy endpoints, data handling conventions are described in 
Section 2.4.4.2. 
2.5.3 Missing data 
For categorical variables, patients with missing data are not included in calculations of 
percentages unless otherwise specified.  When relevant, the number of patients with missing data 
is presented. 
Derived variables will be considered missing if any of the original variables required to calculate 
them are missing. For example, if either a baseline assessment or an endpoint assessment is 
missing for a particular patient, then change from baseline at endpoint will be missing. Depending 
upon the assessment, analyses may not include all patients in the analysis population, because 
certain patients in the intended population may have missing data. 
Incomplete date of first injection 
Date/time of first injection is the first non-missing start date/time of IMP completed in the eCRF 
“Dosing(SAR425899/Placebo)” or “Dosing(Liraglutide)” module . 
For patients who are randomized and dispensed a treatment kit but who are lost to follow-up just 
after Visit 4 (only the treatment kit number is reported in the eCRF dosing module without any 
dose information), the date of first injection will be imputed using the Visit 4 date. When a patient 
is randomized but not dispensed a treatment kit, the dosing module should be blank. In this case, 
the patient will be considered as randomized but not treated, “Not Taken” should be ticked in the 
e-CRF dosing module. 
Handling of computation of treatment duration if IMP end of treatment date is missing 
For the calculation of the treatment duration, the date of the last injection of IMP is equal to the 
date of last administration reported on the eCRF “Treatment Status” page. If this date is missing, 
the exposure duration should be kept as missing.  
The last dose intake should be clearly identified in the eCRF and should not be approximated by 
the last returned package date. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 51 
Handling of medication missing/partial dates 
No imputation of medication start/end dates or times will be performed.  If a medication date or 
time is missing or partially missing and it cannot be determined whether it was taken prior or 
concomitantly, it will be considered a prior, concomitant, and post-treatment medication. 
Handling of missing data for categorical secondary efficacy endpoints 
Please see Section 2.4.4.2. 
Handling of missing data for continuous efficacy endpoints 
Please see Section 2.4.4.1 and Section 2.4.4.2. 
Handling of missing data in the calculation of average 7-point SMPG 
In order to account for the situation that a patient could have SMPG at bedtime after 12 midnight, 
a day interval is defined for the study as 2:01 am-2:00 am the next day.  All the SMPG 
measurements taken during the interval will be considered as measurements of the day.  If there 
are more than one measurement for a time-point of a day, the average value will be used instead. 
Only glucose measurements taken after the previous visit with scheduled 7-point SMPG 
measurements, and within a week of the next visit with scheduled 7-point SMPG measurements 
will be used to choose a SMPG profile for a patient and a visit. A patient has to have value for at 
least 4 time-points during a day interval for the SMPG profile to be considered as a complete 
profile.  The day with a complete profile and the most glucose measurements (in terms of 
time-points) will be chosen as the SMPG profile for the patient and the visit.  If there are more 
than one days with the most glucose measurements, the profile from the day closer to the next 
visit with scheduled 7-point SMPG measurements will be chosen. 
For SMPG by time-point analysis, a similar principal will be applied in selecting the data for 
analysis. A glucose measurement for the time-point taken after previous visit with scheduled 
7-point SMPG measurements, and closest to the next visit with scheduled 7-point SMPG 
measurements will be selected for the by time-point analysis. 
Handling of adverse events/hypoglycemia with missing or partial date/time of onset 
Missing or partial missing AE/hypoglycemia onset dates and times will be imputed so that if the 
partial onset date/time information does not indicate that the AE/hypoglycemia started prior to 
treatment or after the treatment-emergent period, the AE/hypoglycemia will be classified as 
treatment-emergent. No imputation of AE end dates/times will be performed. These data 
imputations are for categorization purpose only and will not be used in listings. No imputation is 
planned for date/time of AE resolution. 
Handling of adverse events/hypoglycemia when date and time of first IMP administration is 
missing 
When the date and time of the first double-blind IMP administration is missing, the day of 
randomization should be considered as the start date of TEAE period.  The exposure duration 
should be kept as missing. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 52 
Handling of adverse events/hypoglycemia when IMP end of treatment date is missing 
For the purpose of defining TEAE period, the date of the last administration of IMP is equal to the 
date of the last administration reported on the eCRF “Treatment Status” page.  
If the date of last administration reported on the eCRF “Treatment Status” page is  
• Partially missing, it will be imputed with a date as late as possible before or on the date of 
last available information on eCRF “Completion of End of Study/Follow-up”.  
• Completely missing, it will be imputed with the date of last available information on eCRF 
“Completion of End of Study/Follow-up” page. 
If the date of last available information on eCRF “Completion of End of Study/Follow-up” page is  
• Partially missing, it will be imputed with a date as late as possible. 
• Completely missing, all adverse events occurred on or after the first administration of 
double-blind IMP will be considered as treatment emergent adverse events. 
Handling of missing assessment of relationship of adverse events to IMP/NIMP/study 
procedures 
If the assessment of the relationship to IMP/NIMP/study procedures is missing, the relationship to 
IMP/NIMP/study procedures has to be assumed and the AE considered as such in the frequency 
tables of possibly related AEs, but no imputation should be done at the data level. 
Handling of missing severity/grades of adverse events 
For a patient and a preferred term, if the severity is missing for one of the treatment-emergent 
occurrences of an AE, the maximal severity on the remaining occurrences for the patient and the 
preferred term will be considered. If the severity is missing for all the occurrences, a “missing” 
category will be added in summary table. 
Handling of potentially clinically significant abnormalities 
If a patient has a missing baseline he will be grouped in the category “normal/missing at 
baseline.” 
For PCSAs with 2 conditions, one based on a change from baseline value or a normal range and 
the other on a threshold value, with the first condition being missing, the PCSA will be based only 
on the second condition. 
For a PCSA defined on a threshold and/or a normal range, this PCSA will be derived using this 
threshold if the normal range is missing; eg, for eosinophils the PCSA is >0.5 GIGA/L or >ULN 
if ULN ≥0.5 GIGA/L.  When ULN is missing, the value 0.5 should be used. 
Measurements flagged as invalid by the laboratory will not be summarized or taken into account 
in the computation of PCSA values. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 53 
2.5.4 Windows for time points / Measurements for analyses 
For statistical analyses on efficacy, PRO questionnaires (WRSM, APPADL and IW-SP), a 
scheduled measurement will be used if it is available, regardless of treatment discontinuation or 
initiation of rescue therapy. An unscheduled measurement will be allocated to a post-baseline visit 
based on the study day that the unscheduled measurement is taken. An allocation is performed 
only if there is no scheduled measurement for the visit to be allocated to.  However, if the 
unscheduled measurement (central laboratory measurement only for laboratory data) is taken on 
the same date of the scheduled visit, the value will be used in the analyses, regardless whether or 
not there is a scheduled measurement for the visit.  
Table 4 - Allocating an unscheduled measurement to a post-baseline visit 
Unscheduled measurement taken 
in study daysa 
Visit to be allocated to  
Targeted study day for the visit 
2 - 20 
Visit 6 (Week2) 
14 
21 - 41 
Visit 8 (Week 4) 
28 
42 - 76 
Visit 9 (Week 8) 
56 
77 - 118 
Visit 10 (Week 14) 
98 
119 - 160 
Visit 11 (Week 20) 
140  
≥161 
Visit 12 (Week 26) 
182 
a Study days are calculated from the day of first IMP injection; the day of first IMP injection is Day 1. 
If more than one measurements are allocated to a visit, the one closest to the targeted study day 
(as shown in table above) will be used. Furthermore, if there are more than one measurement that 
are equally close to the targeted study day but measured on two different dates, measurements 
from the later date will be used. If there are more than one measurement taken on the same date, 
the average will be used. 
The premature treatment discontinuation visit is entered in the eCRF if a patient prematurely 
discontinues treatment. These measurements will be allocated to a scheduled visit using the same 
criteria described above.  
Pre-rescue therapy visit is entered in the eCRF if a patient receives rescue therapy.  These 
measurements will also be allocated to a scheduled visit using the same criteria described above. 
Furthermore, end of treatment visit measurements from patients prematurely discontinue the study 
(“Subject Status” in “Completion of End of Study/Follow-up” page is not “Completed”) with will 
also be allocated to a scheduled visit using the same criteria described above. 
Similar criteria of allocating an unscheduled measurement to a scheduled visit will be used for 
safety variables (laboratory variables, vital sign, ECGs, holter monitor variables), including 
measurements from premature treatment discontinuation visit, pre-rescue therapy visit, and end of 
treatment visit for patients prematurely discontinue the study if any.  However, descriptive 
statistics, PCSA analyses, and shift summaries for safety variables are based only on data from 
TEAE period, a detailed definition of the TEAE period is provided in Section 2.1.4. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 54 
After allocation, if there is still no measurement for a given parameter at a scheduled visit, 
multiple imputation would be applied efficacy and PRO questionnaires as described in 
Section 2.4.4 and Section 2.4.9. 
Baseline definition for efficacy/safety data 
For the safety analyses, the baseline for a given parameter is defined as the last available 
measurement, including unscheduled assessments, assessed prior to the first administration of 
IMP. For the efficacy analyses, the baseline for a given parameter is defined as the last available 
measurement, including unscheduled assessments, assessed prior to the first administration of 
IMP or the last available value on or before the date of randomization if not treated with IMP. 
Summary statistics by visit for continuous efficacy endpoints and PRO questionnaires (WRSM, 
APPADL and IW-SP) 
Summary statistics (N, mean, SD, SE, minimum, median, maximum) of continuous efficacy 
endpoints (observed data and change from baseline) will be provided at scheduled visits as per 
protocol. Summaries showing data by visit will be presented according to the visit number (or re-
allocated visit number) and labeled with the targeted week. The analyses will be based on data 
after applying the allocation of measurements from unscheduled visit, premature treatment 
discontinuation visit, pre-rescue therapy visit, and end of treatment visit as described above in this 
section. 
Last on-treatment value for safety variables (laboratory variables, vital sign, ECGs, holter 
monitor variables) 
The last on-treatment value is the final measurement assessed during treatment epoch for safety 
variables, regardless of the introduction of rescue therapy, including measurements at 
unscheduled visits. The definition of treatment epoch is provided in Section 2.1.4, also see details 
in Section 2.4.5. 
Display of safety data by visit (laboratory variables, vital signs ECGs, holter monitor variables) 
Descriptive statistics (N, mean, SD, minimum, median, maximum) of quantitative laboratory 
variables and vital signs (observed data and change from baseline) during the TEAE period for all 
scheduled visits as per protocol will be provided (ie, only including patients having non-missing 
assessments at a nominal visit). The analyses will be based on data after applying the allocation of 
measurements from unscheduled visit, premature treatment discontinuation visit, pre-rescue 
therapy visit, and end of treatment visit as described above in this section. In addition, these 
summaries will also include a row for the ‘last value on-treatment’ to describe the last available 
on-treatment value (see above). Summaries showing data by visit will be presented according to 
the visit number (or re-allocated visit number) and labeled with the targeted week. 
As specified in the study protocol, laboratory data from scheduled visits are reported by central 
laboratories. The local results will not be used in the efficacy analyses or in the definition of 
baseline for both safety and efficacy analyses. In the safety analyses, local results will only be 
used in the PCSA summary, and only if they are accompanied by a local laboratory normal range. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 55 
When a patient has more than 1 measurement from the central laboratory for the same laboratory 
parameter on the same date, the average of the measurements will be used. For the same 
laboratory parameter, if a patient has more than 1 measurement on different dates for the same 
scheduled visit, the value closest to the date of the visit will be used for the scheduled visit. When 
the values for the same scheduled visit are equidistant to the visit date, the last value should be 
used for the scheduled visit. Similar rules will be applicable to other safety variables (vital signs 
ECGs, holter monitor variables). 
2.5.5 Unscheduled visits 
Unscheduled visit measurements of laboratory data, vital signs, ECG, and holter monitor variables 
will be used for computation of baseline, the last on-treatment value, PCSAs, and the shift 
summaries for safety or efficacy. They will be included in the by-visit summaries if they are 
re-allocated to scheduled visits (see Section 2.5.4) for efficacy variables. For safety variables, they 
also need to be measured during the TEAE period to be included in the by-visit summaries. 
2.5.6 Pooling of centers for statistical analyses 
Center will not be included in the statistical models for efficacy analyses. However, all centers 
within a country will be pooled, and country will be included as fixed effect in the ANCOVA 
model for primary and secondary efficacy endpoints. Countries with fewer than 5 randomized 
patients will be grouped with the country with the lowest number of patients that is 5 or more. 
2.5.7 Statistical technical issues 
None. 
2.5.8 Rescued patient data 
Patients who met the following condition are considered “rescued”: 
• The answer to “Was a rescue therapy started since previous visit?” is “Yes” in the eCRF 
“Rescue Therapy” page. 
• The answer to “Reason for treatment” is “Rescue therapy” in the eCRF “Medications” 
page. 
2.5.9 PRO missing data imputation 
APPADL and IW-SP 
If >50% of item scores is available, impute mean of that data for missing values.  For the 
APPADL, this means that there must be at least 4 items completed and for the IW-SP, there must 
be at least 2 items completed for imputation.  The raw total score will be derived by summing the 
nonmissing item scores and dividing by the number of nonmissing items. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 56 
If the data for any respondent does not meet the missing data rule (>50% completed), then the 
data is considered a missing data point and the procedure for missing data points (placebo 
control-based MI method) is used to analyze the data. 
Missing data imputation for WRSM 
For WRSM, no more than 4 items can be missing out of 20 items.   
If the data for any respondent does not meet the missing data rule (≥80% completed), then the 
data is considered a missing data point and the procedure for missing data points (placebo 
control-based MI method) is used to analyze the data. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 57 
3 
INTERIM ANALYSIS 
Body weight interim analysis: 
An interim analysis for body weight will be conducted when 108 patients (about 24 patients per 
dose arm of SAR425899 and liraglutide and 12 patients from the SAR425899 placebo arm) have 
been randomized and completed 14 weeks of treatment.  
Descriptive statistics will be used to summarize the body weight results and the changes from 
baseline by visit for each treatment group. Number of observations, mean, SD, SE, minimum, 
median, and maximum will be used to summarize the results (using OC). Other exploratory 
analyses on body weight will also be performed including using the ANCOVA model with 
missing post baseline values imputed by placebo control-based MI method as described in 
Section 2.4.4.1. Modeling and simulation will be performed on body weight data. 
In addition, unblinded DMC results (including demographics, disposition, and safety summary) 
and possibly related additional exploratory analyses will also be provided to support compound 
development. 
PK/PD interim analysis: 
An interim analysis for PK/PD will be conducted when 60% of patients have completed the end of 
treatment visit.  Potentially 4 analyses are planned : 
• PK 
• PK/PD with FPG, HbA1c, and body weight 
• PK/safety: with heart rate 
• PK/safety: with GI AEs (nausea and vomiting) 
In addition, Descriptive statistics (Number of observations, mean, SD, SE, minimum, median, and 
maximum) will be used to summarize the body weight, HbA1c and FPG results and the changes 
from baseline by visit for each treatment group based on the efficacy data collected when 60% of 
patients have completed the end of treatment visit.  
Other exploratory analyses on body weight, HbA1c and FPG may also be performed including 
using the ANCOVA model with missing post baseline values imputed by placebo control-based 
MI method as described in Section 2.4.4.1. 
In addition, unblinded DMC results (including demographics, disposition, and safety summary) 
and possibly related additional exploratory analyses may also be provided to support compound 
development. 
Unblinding for interim analyses: 
The descriptive statistics and other exploratory analyses on body weight, HbA1c and FPG, as well 
as unblinded DMC report will be performed by an internal sponsor team, independent of the study 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 58 
team.  Body weight modeling and simulation will be performed by a sponsor internal modeling 
and simulation team providing body weight extrapolation to 6-months and 12-months for obese 
T2DM and obese patients as compared to liraglutide in obese patients supporting project planning. 
The unblinded study data will be kept on a restricted access folder, only independent 
programmers who will perform analyses on body weight, HbA1c and FPG, and provide unblined 
DMC results and related exploratory analyses, or perform data preparation for body weight 
modeling and simulation will have access to the folder. Only those necessary for the conducting 
the analyses and those responsible for internal project planning/overall portfolio planning needs 
(eg, to aid in the planning of future studies) will have the access to the interim analyses results 
before study completion.  A list of these individuals will be maintained. 
All other PK/PD analyses (besides body weight modeling and simulation) will be performed by a 
sponsor internal modeling and simulation team, independent of the study team. Only those 
necessary for conducting the analyses/building the model(s) will have the access to the unblinding 
information and analyses results before study completion and database lock. The purpose of the 
PK/PD analyses is model establishment to accelerate the final PK/PD analyses after study 
completion and database lock. These PK/PD analyses results will not be shared with personnel 
outside of the modeling and simulation team before study completion and database lock. 
All sponsor internal personnel with access to unblinding information will be asked to sign a study 
confidentiality agreement before having access to unblinding information. Study team (including 
PKDM lead) and investigational sites will not have access to interim study results, and continue to 
be blinded to individual randomization codes except for the open-label liraglutide until after study 
completion and database lock. Therefore the two interim analyses will not lead to changes in the 
conduct of the protocol.   
DMC: 
In addition, an independent Data Monitoring Committee (DMC) will be used to monitor and 
assess the safety of patients from this trial through periodic review of the accumulated safety data 
provided by an independent statistical group. Related details are provided in separate documents 
(DMC charter and DMC SAP). 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 59 
4 
DATABASE LOCK 
The database is planned to be locked approximately 4 weeks after the last patient last visit. 
 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 60 
5 
SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION 
All summaries and statistical analyses will be generated using SAS version 9.4 or higher. 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)


Statistical Analysis Plan  
18-Sep-2017 
SAR425899-DRI13940  
Version number: 1 
 
Property of the Sanofi Group - strictly confidential 
Page 61 
6 
REFERENCES 
1. Patrick DL, Bushnell DM, Rothman M. Performance of Two Self-Report Measures for 
Evaluating Obesity and Weight Loss. Obes Res. 2004;12(1):48-57. 
2. Hayes RP, Nelson DR, Meldahl ML, Curtis BH. Ability to perform daily physical activities in 
individuals with type 2 diabetes and moderate obesity: a preliminary validation of the Impact 
of Weight on Activities of Daily Living Questionnaire. Diabetes Technol Ther. 2011;13:705-
12. 
3. Hayes RP, Schultz EM, Naegeli AN, Curtis BH. Test-retest, responsiveness, and minimal 
important change of the ability to perform physical activities of daily living questionnaire in 
individuals with type 2 diabetes and obesity. Diabetes Technol Ther. 2012;14:1118-25 
4. Hayes RP, DeLozier AM. Reliability, validity, and responsiveness of the Impact of Weight on 
Self-Perceptions Questionnaire (IW-SP) in individuals with type 2 diabetes and obesity. 
Diabetes Technol Ther. 2015;17:210-4. 
5. Tang YQ. An efficient multiple imputation algorithm for control-based and delta-adjusted 
patternmixture models using SAS. 
6. Ratitch B, O’Kelly M.  Implementation of Pattern-Mixture Models Using Standard 
SAS/STAT Procedures.  PharmaSUG2011 - Paper SP04. 
7. Yuan Y. Sensitivity Analysis in Multiple Imputation for Missing Data. SAS270-2014. 
 
(electronic 
 
 
 
1.0)